2015 Dodge Challenger (Includes SRT392/SRT Hellcat) Owner`s

2015 Dodge Challenger (Includes SRT392/SRT Hellcat) Owner`s
15D492-126-AD
Fourth Edition Rev 1
Printed in U.S.A.
2015 Challenger SRT 392 / SRT Hellcat
Chrysler Group LLC
2015
OWNER’S MANUAL
Challenger
SRT 392 / SRT Hellcat
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated nondrinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes
in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are
slower, and your judgment is impaired when you
have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2014 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
! INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 ! VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6
! HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 ! VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7
! WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techvehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman- nicians and genuine parts, and cares about your satisfaction.
ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials
that are traditional to our vehicles.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Consult the following table for a description of the
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION 5
1
6 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
VIN Location
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This The vehicle identification number (VIN) is also located
number also appears on the Automobile Information on the right front strut tower inside the engine compartDisclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the ment.
vehicle registration, and the title.
INTRODUCTION 7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
! A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ SRT Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Ignition Or Accessory On Message . . . . . . . . . .15 ! ILLUMINATED ENTRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
! SENTRY KEY® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16 ! REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ To Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
! VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . .24
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .25 ! TRUNK SAFETY WARNING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Trunk Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
! REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM —
! OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . .
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . .
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
! DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
! KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
! SRT ENGINE BREAK-IN
! WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . .41
. . . . . . . .42
. . . . . . . .43
. . . . . . . .54
. . . . . . . .69
. . . . . . . .89
. . . . . . . .89
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38 ! SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
▫ AUTO-Down Feature — If Equipped . . . . . . . .39
▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
! TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Keyless Ignition Node (KIN System) has four operating positions, three of which are labeled and will
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
illuminate when in position. The three positions are: OFF,
consists of a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is START.
transmitter and a Keyless Ignition Node (KIN).
During start, ON/RUN will illuminate.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Feature
NOTE: In case the ignition does not change with the
This vehicle is equipped with the Keyless Enter-N-Go™ push of a button, the RKE transmitter (Key Fob) may
feature. Refer to #Keyless Enter-N-Go™# in #Things To have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a back up
Know Before Starting Your Vehicle# for further informa- method can be used to operate the ignition switch. Put
tion.
the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the
Key Fob against the Engine START/STOP button and
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN)
push to operate the ignition.
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition with
the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is in the passenger compartment.
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
SRT Key Fobs
NOTE: SRT vehicles equipped with the 6.2L Supercharged engine comes with three key fobs (two red and
one black) that allow for different engine power levels.
Please refer to the #Drive Modes# in the “Uconnect
Settings” section for further descriptions.
The Key Fob also contains the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter and an emergency key, which stores in
the rear of the Key Fob.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN System)
1 — OFF
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON/RUN
The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle
should the battery in the vehicle or the Key Fob go dead.
The emergency key is also for locking/unlocking the
glove compartment. You can keep the emergency key
with you when valet parking.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch
on the back of the Key Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out with your other hand.
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Mechanical Latch On The Back Of The Key Fob
Emergency Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key
into the lock cylinders with either side up.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
Ignition Or Accessory On Message
Opening the driver’s door when the ignition is in ACC or
ON (engine not running), a chime will sound to remind
you to cycle the ignition to OFF. In addition to the chime,
the ignition or accessory on message will display in the
cluster.
NOTE: With the Uconnect® system, the power window
switches, radio, power sunroof (if equipped), and power
outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is placed in the OFF position. Opening either
front door will cancel this feature. The time for this
feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the Key Fob from vehicle, place the ignition
in the OFF and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
The system uses a Key Fob with a factory-mated Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, a Keyless Ignition Node
(KIN) and a RF receiver to prevent unauthorized vehicle
operation. Therefore, only Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will not allow the engine to crank
if an invalid Key Fob is used to start and operate the
vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if an invalid Key Fob is used to start the engine.
After placing the ignition to the ON/RUN position, the
Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three seconds for a
bulb check. If the light remains on after the bulb check, it
indicates that there is a problem with the electronics. In
SENTRY KEY®
addition, if the light begins to flash after the bulb check,
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system prevents unauthor- it indicates that someone used an invalid Key Fob to start
ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation engine being shut off after two seconds.
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10
seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon
as possible by an authorized dealer.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key® Immobilizer system is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
All of the Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only Key Fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the
vehicle. Once a Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Always remove the Key Fobs from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of Key Fobs.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Duplication of Key Fobs may be performed at an autho- • This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause underized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a
sired operation.
blank Key Fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank Key Fob
is one that has never been programmed.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key® Immobilizer Sys- by the party responsible for compliance could void the
tem serviced, bring all vehicle Key Fobs with you to the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
authorized dealer.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
Customer Key Programming
The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be and trunk for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch
performed at an authorized dealer.
for unauthorized operation. While the Vehicle Security
Alarm is armed, interior switches for door locks and
General Information
decklid release are disabled. If something triggers the
The Sentry Key® system complies with FCC rules part 15 alarm, the Vehicle Security Alarm will provide the foland with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is lowing audible and visible signals: the horn will pulse,
subject to the following conditions:
the headlights will turn on, park lamps and/or turn
signals will flash, and the Vehicle Security Light in the
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
instrument cluster will flash.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the system will turn off the horn after approximately 29 seconds, turn off all of the visual signals after
5 seconds, and then the system will rearm itself up to 8
times.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicles ignition is cycled to the “OFF”
position (refer to #Starting Procedures# in #Starting
And Operating# for further information).
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™,
make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF.
• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™, make sure the vehicle ignition system is OFF,
and the key is physically removed from the ignition.
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the
vehicle:
• Push LOCK on the interior power door lock switch
with the driver and/or passenger door open.
• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive Entry
Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available in the
same exterior zone (refer to #Keyless Enter-N-Go™#
in #Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle# for
further information).
• Push the LOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The Vehicle Security Alarm remains armed during
power trunk entry. Pushing the trunk button will not
The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of
disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm. If someone enters
the following methods:
the vehicle through the trunk and opens any door, the
• Push the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless
alarm will sound.
Entry (RKE) transmitter.
• When the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed, the interior
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle (if
power door lock switches will not unlock the doors.
equipped, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in #Things
The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle# for further
vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the
information).
system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ• Advance the vehicle ignition system out of the OFF ously described arming sequences has occurred, the
position.
Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
NOTE:
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,
• The driver’s door key cylinder and the Trunk button disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
on the RKE transmitter cannot arm or disarm the If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery
Vehicle Security Alarm.
becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will
remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the
To Disarm The System
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the
outside mirrors — if equipped. Refer to “Mirrors” in
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.
“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for furTamper Alert
ther information.
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,
your absence, the horn will sound three times and the
or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition
exterior lights will blink three times when you disarm the
switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.
Vehicle Security Alarm. Check the vehicle for tampering.
NOTE:
Security System Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the • The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy lights do not turn on if the dimmer control is in
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
the “Dome defeat” position (extreme bottom position).
ILLUMINATED ENTRY
• The Illuminated Entry system will not operate if the
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to unlock the
doors or open any door.
dimmer control is in the “Dome defeat” position
(extreme bottom position).
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock the doors,
open the trunk, or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held
Key Fob with RKE transmitter. The RKE transmitter does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
NOTE: Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and above
disables the system from responding to all RKE transmitter buttons for all RKE transmitters.
Key Fob With RKE Transmitter
To Unlock The Doors
Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal
lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The
illuminated entry system will also turn on.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to Headlight Illumination On Approach
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
1st Push Of Key Fob Unlocks
equipped through Uconnect®. To change the current
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Under- To Lock The Doors
standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitFlash Lights With Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked with the RKE transmitter. This
feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the
current setting, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
ter to lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash, and
the horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
Sound Horn With Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting, The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your you turn it off by either pushing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 MPH
Instrument Panel” for further information.
(24 km/h) or greater.
To Unlatch The Trunk
NOTE:
Push the TRUNK button on the RKE transmitter two
times within five seconds to unlatch the trunk.
• The interior lights will turn off if you place the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN position while the Panic
If the vehicle is equipped with Passive Entry, refer to
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
“Keyless Enter-N-Go™” under “Things To Know Before
horn will remain on.
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the RKE transmitter to turn off the
To turn the Panic Alarm feature on or off, push and hold
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at least one
by the system.
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is activated,
the turn signals will flash, the horn will pulse on and off, Programming Additional Transmitters
and the interior lights will turn on.
Programming Key Fobs or RKE transmitters may be
performed at an authorized dealer.
Using The Panic Alarm
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Transmitter Battery Replacement
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
2
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical
latch on the back of the RKE transmitter sideways
with your thumb and then pull the key out with your
other hand.
Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Emergency Key Removal
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Separating RKE halves requires screw removal, if 3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over
equipped, and gently prying the two halves of the
(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a
RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the
seal during removal.
battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign
on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery
clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
with rubbing alcohol.
4. To assemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together, reposition and secure the screw as
shown in step #2 for removal.
General Information
Separating Keyless Ignition Node (KIN) Transmitter
Case
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
• This device must accept any interference received, REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveNOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved
niently from outside the vehicle while still
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
maintaining security. The system has a range of
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
approximately 300 ft (91 m).
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
NOTE:
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of • The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station • Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
reduce this range.
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB
radios.
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote start event
• Vehicle security alarm not active
• Ignition in Off position (Keyless Enter-N-Go™)
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds. The vehicle doors will lock, the parking
lights will flash, and horn will chirp twice (if
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute Vehicle
cycle.
Push and release the REMOTE START button one time or
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present, the vehicle will start and NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system
will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START
then shut down 10 seconds later.
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during Start request.
Remote Start mode.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is Before the end of 15 minute cycle, push and release the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock the
in the Remote Start mode.
doors, or unlock the vehicle using Passive Entry via the
• The engine can be started two consecutive times with door handles, and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
the RKE transmitter. However, the ignition must be equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
activated by pushing the START/STOP button twice push and release the START/STOP button.
(or the ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
position) before you can repeat the start sequence for a
third cycle.
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with the Keyless Enter-N- DOOR LOCKS
Go™ feature, the message “Push Button/Insert Key” will
Manual Door Locks
display in the Driver Information Display (DID) until
To lock each door, push the door lock knob on each door
you push the START button.
trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the door
Cancel Remote Start
lock knob on each door trim panel upward.
Remote Starting will also cancel if any of the following
occur:
• The engine stalls or engine speed exceeds 2500 rpm.
• Any engine warning lights come on.
• Low Fuel Light turns on.
• The hood is opened.
• The hazard switch is pushed.
• The shift lever is moved out of PARK.
• The brake pedal is pushed.
Door Lock Knob
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
If the door lock knob is down when you shut the door,
the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the Key Fob is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of a
collision, lock the vehicle doors before you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
2
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Door Locks
The power door lock switch is located on each door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ (Passive Entry) system. For further
information, refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle.”
If you push the power door lock switch while the ignition
is on, and either door is open, the power locks will not
operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the
Key Fob in the vehicle. Turning off the ignition or closing
the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door is open,
the ignition is either cycled to ACC or RUN (engine not
running), a chime will sound as a reminder.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
Power Door Lock Switch
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The
auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer or through the Uconnect® Settings in
your radio.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically if:
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is en- KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO™
abled.
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a
feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go™. This feature allows you
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to
3. The transmission is in PARK.
push the RKE transmitter lock or unlock buttons.
4. The driver door is opened.
NOTE:
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF; refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been
raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock
sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower response time.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry door handle
and no door goes ajar within 60 seconds, the vehicle
will re-lock and if equipped will arm the security
alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:
With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the driver door handle, grab the front driver door
handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically. The
interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is
unlocked.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed all
doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
To Unlock From The Passenger Side:
With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the passenger door handle, grab the front passenger
door handle to unlock both doors automatically. The
interior door panel lock knob will raise when the door is
unlocked.
NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door
unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).
If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel
switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors
have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and
outside of the vehicle for any Passive Entry RKE transmitters. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid
Passive Entry RKE transmitters are detected outside the
vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks
all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times (on the
third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry
RKE transmitter can be locked in the vehicle).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE To Enter The Trunk:
Transmitter In Vehicle
With a Passive Entry RKE transmitter within 5 ft (1.5 m)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a of the deck lid, push the button located on the center of
Passive Entry RKE transmitter inside your vehicle, the the light bar which is located on the deck lid above the
Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door license plate.
unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch
is in the OFF position.
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door
handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock both
doors.
Trunk Passive Entry Button
NOTE: If you inadvertently leave your vehicle’s Passive
Entry RKE transmitter in the trunk and try to close the
deck lid, the deck lid will automatically unlatch, unless
another one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE transmitters is outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
deck lid.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Do NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the door NOTE:
handle button. This could unlock the door(s).
• After pushing the door handle button, you must wait
two seconds before you can lock or unlock the doors,
using either Passive Entry door handle. This is done to
allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle, without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE
transmitter battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE
transmitter lock button or the lock button located on the
vehicle’s interior door panel.
Do NOT Grab The Handle When Locking
2
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There is a single window control on the passenger’s door
trim panel that operates the window on the passenger’s
Power Windows
door. The window controls will operate only when the
The window controls on the driver’s door control both of ignition switch is in the ON/RUN or ACC position.
the door windows.
NOTE:
WINDOWS
• The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the power
windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the
ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when
either front door is opened. The time for this feature is
programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Power Window Switches
• The door window will lower slightly if it is closed
completely when opening the door. The window will
return to its fully closed position after closing the door.
This action allows the door to open without resistance
and prevents window and seal damage.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, and do
not let children play with power windows. Do not
leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
location accessible to children, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-NGo™ in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power
window switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
AUTO-Down Feature — If Equipped
The driver’s door power window switch and passenger
door power window switch have an AUTO-down feature. Push the window switch to the second detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
The power window switches will remain active for up to
10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
Opening either door will cancel this feature. The time for
this feature is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, the
The trunk lid can be released from inside the vehicle by Trunk Open symbol will display in the instrument cluster
pushing the Trunk Release button. The button is located indicating that the trunk is open. The odometer display
on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. will reappear once the trunk is closed.
NOTE: The transmission must be in PARK before the With the ignition switch in the OFF position or the key
button will operate. If equipped with a manual transmis- removed from the ignition switch, the Trunk Open symsion, the vehicle speed must be under 5 mph (8 km/h) bol will display until the trunk is closed.
before the button will operate.
Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in “Things To Know
TRUNK LOCK AND RELEASE
Trunk Release
Button
The trunk lid can be released from Before Starting Your Vehicle” for more information on
outside the vehicle by pushing the trunk operation with the Passive Entry feature.
Trunk Release button on the ReTRUNK SAFETY WARNING
mote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice within five seconds or
WARNING!
by using the external release switch
located on the underside of the Do not allow children to have access to the trunk,
decklid overhang. The release fea- either by climbing into the trunk from outside, or
ture will function only when the
vehicle is in the unlock condition.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
WARNING! (Continued)
through the inside of the vehicle. Always close the
trunk lid when your vehicle is unattended. Once in
the trunk, young children may not be able to escape,
even if they entered through the rear seat. If trapped
in the trunk, children can die from suffocation or
heat stroke.
Trunk Emergency Release
As a security measure, a Trunk Internal Emergency
Release lever is built into the trunk latching mechanism.
Trunk Emergency Internal Release
In the event of an individual being locked inside the
trunk, the trunk can be opened by activating the glow- OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
in-the-dark handle attached to the trunk latching mechaSome of the most important safety features in your
nism.
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
• Child Restraints
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Important Safety Precautions
use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a rear
seat.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as 4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind
possible.
them or under their arm.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the 5. You should read the instructions provided with your
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
child restraint to make sure that you are using it
properly.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing
child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat, 7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
move the seat as far back as possible and use the
back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front
proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)
Air Bags room to inflate.
3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat 8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
belt properly (Refer to #Child Restraints#) should be
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
secured in a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
belt-positioning booster seats. Older children who do not
between you and the door and you could be injured.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under #If You Need Assistance.#
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and could cause a collision that includes you. This can
happen far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver
and outboard front passenger (if equipped with outboard front passenger BeltAlert) to buckle their seat
belts. The feature is active whenever the ignition is in
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or heavy
object is on the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended that
pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet
harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
The BeltAlert warning sequence begins after the vehicle
and cargo is properly stowed.
speed is over 5 MPH (8 km/h) by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime. BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your authoOnce the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deactiduration or until the respective seat belts are buckled. vating BeltAlert.
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated, the Seat Belt
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate while the
are buckled. The driver should instruct all other occudriver’s or outboard front passenger’s (if equipped with
pants to buckle their seat belts. If an outboard front seat
BeltAlert) seat belt remains unbuckled.
belt is unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5
MPH (8 km/h), BeltAlert will provide both audio and Lap/Shoulder Belts
visual notification.
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
the START or ON/RUN position. If the driver or
outboard front seat passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until both
outboard front seat belts are buckled.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active lap/shoulder belts.
when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very
sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
(Continued)
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at
the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat
belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In
a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the
seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If
you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take
it to your authorized dealer immediately and have
it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle
will not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
(Continued)
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the seat belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify
the seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies must be
replaced after a collision.
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles
equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and
pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go
around your lap.
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove
slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder
belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch
plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces
the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180° to
create a fold that begins immediately above the latch
Positioning The Lap Belt
plate.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and
chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort- 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
the latch plate.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its
folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Extender
WARNING! (Continued)
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when • Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can
the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper
increase the risk of serious injury or death in a
shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest
collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the
position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a
lap belt is not long enough and only use in the
Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used
recommended seating positions. Remove and store
only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occupant, it must be removed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
required in order to properly fit the original seat
belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender
if, when worn, the distance between the front edge
of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
(Continued)
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the seat belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the seat belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Seat Belt Pretensioner
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning
devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat
belt in the event of a collision. These devices may
improve the performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy
Management feature in the front seating positions that
may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly
that is designed to release webbing in a controlled
manner.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) — If Equipped
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
worn snugly and positioned properly.
(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re- For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten- Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or Restraints” section of this manual. The table below
defines the type of feature for each seating position.
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a #click.#
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to
remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic
Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a
seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.
Children 12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the
seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate
the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking
sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,
you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat
belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not working
properly when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could
increase the risk of injury in collisions.
(Continued)
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain
occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children
who are using booster seats. The locked mode is
only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing
child restraints that have a harness for restraining
the child.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Air Bag System Components
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Advanced Front Air Bags
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretenioners
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bags
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
system components:
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
• Air Bag Warning Light
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
• Steering Wheel and Column
words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on
• Instrument Panel
the air bag covers.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
WARNING!
Advanced Front Air Bags And Knee Impact Bolster
Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides Advanced Front Air Bags.
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
WARNING!
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact • No objects should be placed over or near the air
sensors or other system components.
bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel,
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy
output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy
output is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
seat position.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether
because any such objects could cause harm if the
vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the
air bags to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag
covers or attempt to open them manually. You may
damage the air bags and you could be injured
because the air bags may no longer be functional.
The protective covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags are
inflating.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Advanced Front Air Bag Operation
Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Advanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk
of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal
collisions, including some that may produce substantial
vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should
have deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right
side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the
2
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:
blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while 1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The
SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG”
Knee Impact Bolsters
label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the
driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front
Air Bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact
bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact
bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band
radios, etc.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury 2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
during certain side impact and certain rollover events, in
(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim
addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the
covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or
seat belts and body structure.
“AIRBAG.”
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB
deploys through the seat seam into the space between the
occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high
speed and with such a high force that it could injure you
if you are not seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head injury to front
and rear seat outboard occupants. SABICs may reduce
the risk of injuries in certain side impact and vehicle
rollover events, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure.
The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the
trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs
inflate with enough force to injure you if you are not
belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned in
the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side
windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up
high enough to block the deployment of the
SABICs. The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path
are located should remain free from any obstructions.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for
the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any
accessory items in your vehicle which could alter
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to
activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover
events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in
a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags should have deployed.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint
system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously
injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should
never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an
infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are
necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also
help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air
Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,
occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit
upright with their backs against the seats. Children must
be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat
that is appropriate for the size of the child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deployment could cause you to be severely injured or
killed.
(Continued)
2
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air
Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even
though you have Side Air Bags.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,
including some collisions at certain angles, or some side
collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger
compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during
angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced
Front Air Bags deploy.
Rollover Events
NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover
events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of
trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is approSide Impacts
priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle
In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
determining the appropriate response to impact events. Side Air Bags should have deployed.
The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on
the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.
Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover
Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact event may be in progress and whether deployment is
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A
impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt pretensioners as well as the SABs and SABICs on both sides of
the vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy
the seat belt pretensioners, with or without the SABs and
SABICs, on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle
experiences a near rollover event.
If A Deployment Occurs
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions
and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags
deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent and
normally heal quickly. However, if you haven’t healed
significantly within a few days, or if you have any
blistering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de- Enhanced Accident Response System
ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air In the event of an impact, if the communication network
bags will not be in place to protect you.
remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending
on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine
WARNING!
whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response SysDeployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot tem perform the following functions:
protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller
System serviced as well.
NOTE:
• Cut off fuel to the engine.
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
until the ignition is placed in the “OFF” position.
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition is placed in
the “OFF” position.
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
• Unlock the doors automatically.
but they will open during air bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
functions after an event, the ignition must be changed
from ignition START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the
instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds
Air Bag Warning Light
for a self-check when the ignition is first placed in the
ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
The air bags must be ready to inflate for your Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a malprotection in a collision. The Occupant Re- function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag
straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on
with air bag system electrical components.
again after initial startup.
System Reset Procedure
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition is in the START
or ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF
position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not
on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate
the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.
While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance
2
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
WARNING!
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during
the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN position.
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the air bags
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first placed in
the on position, and stays on after you start the
vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to
eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving.
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition
the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental
Restraint System (“SRS”), the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
will stay on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected.
If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on
intermittently or remains on while driving have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. For
additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light refer to the “Instrument Panel” section of
this manual.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
2
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was pushing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the
vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children.
Every state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in proper
restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There are different sizes and types of restraints for NOTE:
children from newborn size to the child almost large
• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org
enough for an adult seat belt. Always check the child seat
or call 1–866–SEATCHECK (732–8243). Canadian resiOwner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat
dents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for
for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instrucadditional information:
tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s Manual
• www.tc.gc.ca/eng/roadsafety/
and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large for Child
Restraints
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached
the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Children who are at least two years
old or who have out-grown the
height or weight limit of their rearfacing child restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but
are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger,
who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their booster seat
Recommended Type Of Child
Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Restraint, facing rearward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with
a five-point Harness, facing forward
in the rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear
seat of the vehicle
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing
in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they
reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing
child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.
It is recommended for children from birth until they
reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats
often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing
direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant
carrier but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the
highest weight or height allowed by their convertible
child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of
an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle
with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant
or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.
The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do
not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward
because it can loosen the child restraint attachments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting
the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has
been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the A child’s squirming or slouching can move the seat belt
vehicle’s seat belt alone:
out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or
neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of
use a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
the vehicle seat?
correctly.
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the
WARNING!
way back?
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt
between their neck and arm?
will not protect a child properly, which may result in
4. Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as possible, serious injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt
touching the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
correctly.
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
2
•
•
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per
seating position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s weight
+ weight of the child restraint) for using
the LATCH anchorage system to attach
the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the
seat belt be used together to attach a
rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint?
Can two child restraints be attached
using a common lower LATCH
anchorage?
No
No
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and the child restraint
is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchor instead of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing
or forward-facing child restraint.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using the LATCH
anchorages in an outboard position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer
also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Center only may be removed.
Locating LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage symbols on the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
LATCH Anchorages
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located in the panel between the rear seatback and the rear window.
They are found under a plastic cover with the
tether anchorage symbol on it.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks
the seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position,
do not use that outboard position. If a child seat in the
center position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or
seat belt, do not install a child seat in that outboard
position.
Tether Strap Anchorages
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing
The LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
may need to recline the seat and/or raise the head
Always follow the directions of the child restraint
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Not
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
all child restraint systems will be installed as described
move it to its rear-most position to make room for the
here.
child seat. You may also move the front seat forward
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
to allow more room for the child seat.
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto- 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seatbelt, following the instructions below. See the section
ing position.
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”
to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
WARNING! (Continued)
• Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted
child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to
be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat
belt tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.”
2
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
Restraints in this Vehicle
• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
•
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the
child restraint?
Yes
No
Yes
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward facing
child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the
child restraint manufacturer also allows
contact.
Center Only may be removed
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
the seat belt until you have pulled all the seat belt
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
webbing out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and
to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This means the
rear-most position to make room for the child seat.
seat belt is now in the Automatic Locking mode.
You may also move the front seat forward to allow
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
more room for the child seat.
locked, you should not be able to pull out any web2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
to pass it through the seat belt path of the child
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
path.
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
vehicle seat.
“click.”
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the seat belt
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
in any direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
seat belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat
to any location in front of the car seat, including the
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the
tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the
section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
tether anchorage. You may need to move the
seat forward to provide better access to the
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage for
that seating position, move the child restraint to another
position in the vehicle if one is available.
2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the anchor directly
behind the seat where you are placing the child
restraint.
3. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
Tether Strap Mounting
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If
your vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear head 1 — Cover
A — Tether Strap Hook
restraints, raise the head restraint, and where possible, 3 — Attaching Strap
B — Tether Anchor
route the tether strap under the head restraint and
between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head
4. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
restraint and pass the tether strap around the outboard
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
side of the head restraint.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
5. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child Transporting Pets
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
WARNING!
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to a collision.
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly
behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove
slack in the strap.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
SRT ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
SRT Engine Break-In Recommendations: The following
tips will be helpful in obtaining optimum performance
and maximum durability for your new SRT Vehicle.
Despite modern technology and World Class manufacturing methods, the moving parts of the vehicle must still
wear in with each other. This wearing in occurs mainly
during the first 500 miles (805 km) and continues through
the first oil change interval.
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
It is recommended for the operator to observe the follow- 100 to 300 miles (161 to 483 km):
ing driving behaviors during the new vehicle break-in
• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more
period:
than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration in lower
0 to 100 miles (0 to 161 km):
gears (1st to 3rd gears).
• Do not allow the engine to operate at idle for an • Avoid aggressive braking.
extended period of time.
• Drive with the engine speed less than 5,000 RPM.
• Depress the accelerator pedal slowly and not more
• Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h) and
than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration.
observe local speed limits.
• Avoid aggressive braking.
300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km):
• Drive with the engine speed less than 3,500 RPM.
• Exercise the full engine rpm range, shifting manually
• Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph (88 km/h) and
(paddles or gear shift) at higher rpms when possible.
observe local speed limits.
• Do not perform sustained operation with the accelerator pedal at wide open throttle.
• Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph (136 km/h) and
observe local speed limits.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
For the first 1500 mi (2414 km):
SAFETY TIPS
• Do not participate in track events, sport driving Transporting Passengers
schools, or similar activities during the first 1500 mi NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
(2414 km).
AREA.
NOTE: Check engine oil with every refueling and add if
WARNING!
necessary. Oil and fuel consumption may be higher
through the first oil change interval.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/
rear doors open, make sure that all windows are
closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is
set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation
mode.
(Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
not lit during starting, see your authorized dealer. If the
light stays on, flickers, or comes on while driving, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for Defroster
cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
system.
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperFront seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
able.
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, Floor Mat Safety Information
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
Air Bag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle
control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
should be located and corrected immediately.
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Tires
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
! MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103 ! BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF
EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .103
▫ Rear Cross Path — If Equipped. . . . . . . . .
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
▫ Modes Of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
! SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ Front Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . .
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . .
▫ “Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
3
. . .112
. . .118
. . .120
. . .121
. . .121
. . .122
. . .124
. . .125
. . .126
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Manual Front Seatback Recline . . . . . . . . . . . .127
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Passenger Seat Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
! TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .132
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
! LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
▫ Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .135
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
! WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . .
▫ Automatic High Beam — If Equipped . . . . . .136
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
. . . . . .142
. . . . . .143
. . . . . .143
. . . . . .143
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .145
! TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN . . .146
! POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING
COLUMN — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
! HEATED STEERING WHEEL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
! ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
! ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation . . . .156
▫ Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC). . . .157
▫ To Activate/Deactivate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
▫ To Set A Desired ACC Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
▫ To Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
▫ To Turn Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ To Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
▫ Setting The Following Distance In ACC . . . . . .163
3
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Overtake Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167 ! PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu . . . . . . .167
▫ ParkSense® Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Display Warnings And Maintenance . . . . . . . .168
▫ ParkSense® Warning Display . . . . . . . . .
▫ Precautions While Driving With ACC . . . . . . .170
▫ ParkSense® Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense® . . . .
▫ Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
! FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Cleaning The ParkSense® System . . . . . .
▫ Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Turning FCW ON Or OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180
. . . .181
. . . .182
. . . .182
. . . .182
. . . .187
. . . .188
. . . .189
▫ ParkSense® System Usage Precautions. . . . . . .189
! PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
▫ Changing FCW Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180 ! OVERHEAD CONSOLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
▫ Service FCW Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
! GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .194
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink® . .195
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .198
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .199
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
▫ Using HomeLink® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201 ! ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .206
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202 ! CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
! POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .203
▫ Front Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
▫ Rear Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .204 ! STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
3
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Glove Compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211 ! REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
▫ Console Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
MIRRORS
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is
a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the windshield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with
a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for
mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,
left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.
• Push the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the
feature On.
• Push the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn
the feature Off.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you.
NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear
view viewing.
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned
Automatic Dimming Mirror
On or Off through the touchscreen.
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and
a 9-1-1 button.
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The ASSIST and 9–1–1 features operate through • Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other
the Uconnect® Access service. These buttons will only
vehicle issues.
operate as long as your Uconnect® Access service is 9-1-1 Call
active. Refer to your “Uconnect® System supplement
1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.
manual” for further information.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you
to any one of the following support centers:
NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call
system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the
9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the
Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the
Phone Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror off.
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a
tow, just push the Assist button and you’ll be connected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance
will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
2. The LED light located between the Assist and 9-1-1
Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.
buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a
• Uconnect® Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support
connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.
for Uconnect® Access and Uconnect® Access Via
Mobile features.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1
operator is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit
the following important vehicle information to a 9-1-1
operator:
• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator
through the vehicle audio system to determine if
additional help is needed.
NOTE: Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s
9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1 operator may be able to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional help is needed. Once
the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection with the
vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator should be able to
speak with you or other vehicle occupants and hear
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call
system will attempt to remain connected with the 9-1-1
operator until the 9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.
5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate
emergency responders and provide them with important vehicle information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,
fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions
or location), do not wait for voice contact from a
9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
(Continued)
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket
electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical system. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a
signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid interference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,
never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way
mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas
on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,
AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system
could cause the air bag system to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to help protect you.
(Continued)
9-1-1 Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1
Call system capabilities.
9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and
Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.
If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the
following may occur at the time the malfunction is
detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between the Assist
and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated
red.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
• The Phone Screen will display the following message
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please contact your
dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle phone
requires service. Please contact your dealer.”
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you
will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview
Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on
the Air Bag Warning Light on the instrument panel
if a malfunction in any part of the system is
detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air bag system may not be working
properly and the 9-1-1 system may not be able to
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
send a signal to a 9-1-1 operator. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an authorized
dealer service the ORC system immediately.
Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors
beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the
9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not
limited to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.
• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are
damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes disconnected during a vehicle crash.
3
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Wireless and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)
are unavailable or obstructed.
this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.
CAUTION!
• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.
• Wireless network congestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.
NOTE: Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
wireless and GPS antennas. You could prevent wireless
and GPS signal reception, which can prevent your vehicle
from placing an emergency call. Wireless and GPS signal
reception is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function
properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
3
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature
The mirrors are equipped with a rotational hinge. The
mirrors have one detent (clockwise) towards the rear of
the vehicle and three detent’s (counterclockwise) towards
the front of the vehicle.
Folding Mirrors
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The power mirror controls consist of mirror select butThe power mirror controls are located on the driver-side tons and a four-way mirror control switch. To adjust a
mirror, press either the L (left) or R (right) to select the
door trim panel.
mirror that you want to adjust.
Power Mirrors
NOTE: A light in the selected button will illuminate
indicating the mirror is activated and can be adjusted.
Using the mirror control switch, press on any of the four
arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to
move.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
Power Mirror Controls
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature can be activated whenever you turn on the
rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear
Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle” for further information.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Vanity Mirrors
A vanity mirror is located on the sun visor. To use the
mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward.
3
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically.
Close the mirror cover to turn off the light.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
“Slide-On-Rod” And Extender Features Of Sun
Visor
To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature of the sun visor, rotate
the sun visor downward and swing the sun visor so it is
parallel to the side window, grabbing the sun visor with
your left hand pull rearwards until the sun visor is in the
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
desired position. To use the extender feature of the sun BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — IF EQUIPPED
visor, grab the extender which is located at the rear of the The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses two radarvisor and pull rearward.
based sensors, located inside the rear bumper fascia, to
detect highway licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Slide-On-Rod Extender
Rear Detection Zones
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning light will
momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors
to let the driver know that the system is operational.
Automatic Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters stand-by mode
when the vehicle is in PARK.
Manual Transmission Vehicles
The BSM system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any gear and enters stand-by mode when the Park Brake
BSM Warning Light
is engaged, the vehicle is not in REVERSE, and the
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane
vehicle is stationary.
width on both sides of the vehicle (12 ft or 3.8 m). The
zone length starts at the outside rear view mirror and
extends approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear
bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors the
detection zones on both sides of the vehicle when the
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or The area on the rear fascia where the radar sensors are
higher and will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas. located must remain free of snow, ice, and dirt/road
contamination so that the BSM system can function
NOTE:
properly. Do not block the area of the rear fascia where
• The BSM system does NOT alert the driver about the radar sensors are located with foreign objects (bumrapidly approaching vehicles that are outside the de- per stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
tection zones.
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT change if detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning light
your vehicle is towing a trailer. Therefore, visually located in the outside mirrors in addition to sounding an
verify the adjacent lane is clear for both your vehicle audible (chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
and trailer before making a lane change. If the trailer or Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further information.
other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment) extends
The BSM system monitors the detection zone from three
beyond the side of your vehicle, this may result in the
different entry points (side, rear, front) while driving to
BSM warning light remaining illuminated the entire
see if an alert is necessary. The BSM system will issue an
time the vehicle is in a forward gear.
alert during these types of zone entries.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Entering From The Side
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from either Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on either
side of the vehicle.
side and enter the rear detection zone with a relative
speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Side Monitoring
Rear Monitoring
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly (with a relative speed
of less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the vehicle remains in
the blind spot for approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning
light will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert on
stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, walls, foliage,
berms, etc. However, occasionally the system may alert
on such objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that are
traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle in
adjacent lanes.
3
Overtaking/Passing
Stationary Objects
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
system is not designed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your vehicle’s
mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path — If Equipped
Opposing Traffic
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid to
help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM
(Continued)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the
drivers when backing out of parking spaces where their
vision of oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
NOTE: In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
sensors are blocked by other structures or vehicles, the
system will not be able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the
driver is alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
WARNING!
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle, for objects that are moving toward the side of
the vehicle with a minimum speed of approximately
3 mph (5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
RCP is not a Back Up Aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful when
backing up, even when using RCP. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
turn signal is then activated, and it corresponds to an
Three selectable modes of operation are available in the alert present on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are present on the same side at the same
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further intime, both the visual and audio alerts will be issued. In
formation.
addition to the audible alert the radio (if on) volume will
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
be reduced.
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM NOTE:
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate side
• Whenever an audible alert is requested by the BSM
view mirror based on a detected object. However, when
system, the radio volume is reduced.
the system is operating in Rear Cross Path mode, the
system will respond with both visual and audible alerts • If the hazard flashers are on, the system will request
when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible
the appropriate visual alert only.
alert is requested, the radio volume is reduced.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall respond with
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
both visual and audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is requested, the radio
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime mode,
the BSM system will provide a visual alert in the appro- volume is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
priate side view mirror based on a detected object. If the
Modes Of Operation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opWhen the BSM system is turned off there will be no
eration of the device.
visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or RCP
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
systems.
other than an authorized service facility could void
NOTE: The BSM system will store the current operating
authorization to use this equipment.
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the vehicle
is started the previously stored mode will be recalled and SEATS
used.
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
General Information
vehicle.
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
WARNING!
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
Blind Spot Alert Off
(Continued)
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Power Seats
The power seat switches are located on the outboard side
of the front seat cushions. The power seat switches are
used to control the position of the seat.
Power Seat Switch
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Push the switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward on the switch will
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
raise and lower the position of the support.
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
switch when the desired position is reached.
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
the switch when the desired position is reached.
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats
are also equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar
switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat.
Push the switch forward to increase the lumbar support.
Power Lumbar Switch
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
The front heated seats control buttons are located within
the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the control
buttons through the climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated seat button
setting ON.
once to turn the High
• Press the heated seat button
the Low setting ON.
a second time to turn
• Press the heated seat button
the heating elements OFF.
a third time to turn
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automatically switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display
will change from HI to LO, indicating the change. The
LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats
to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated seats can be programed to come on during a
remote start.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are small fans
that draw the air from the passenger compartment and
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
move air through fine perforations in the seat cover to Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
help keep the driver and front passenger cooler in higher
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds,
ventilated seats can be programed to come on during a
HI and LO.
remote start.
The front ventilated seats control buttons are located
This feature can be programmed through the Uconnect®
within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the
system. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understandcontrol buttons through the climate screen or the controls
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
screen.
once to choose HI. Manual Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
• Press the ventilated seat button
The adjusting bar is located at the front of the seat, near
• Press the ventilated seat button
a second time to
the floor. Pull the bar upward to move the seat forward or
choose LO.
rearward. Release the bar once the seat is in the desired
• Press the ventilated seat button
a third time to position. Using body pressure, move forward and rearturn the ventilated seat OFF.
ward on the seat to be sure that the seat adjusters have
latched.
NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
3
Manual Front Seatback Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired
position and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift
the lever, lean forward and release the lever.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Passenger Seat Easy Entry
On the passenger seat, pull forward on the lever located
on the side of the seatback in order to dump the seatback
and slide the seat forward. You can also temporarily
remove the seat belt from the guide loop on the seat and
allow the seat belt to retract out of the way. This allows
for easier access to the rear seat. To return the seat to a
normal seating position, first return the seatback to its
original recline location and then slide the entire seat
back to the pre-set lock position.
Easy Entry Lever
Head Restraints
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
WARNING!
return to their normal position see your authorized
dealer immediately.
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
3
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
The front driver and passenger seats are equipped with
Active Head Restraints (AHR). In the event of a rear
impact the AHRs will automatically extend forward
minimizing the gap between the back of the occupants
head and the AHR.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
The AHRs will automatically return to their normal 3 — Seat Belt Loop
position following a rear impact. If the AHRs do not
Head Restraint
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located at the base of the head restraint and
push downward on the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, remove the seat belt from
the seat belt loop. Raise the head restraint as far as it can
go then push the adjustment button and release button at
the base of each post while pulling the head restraint up.
To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes while pushing the adjustment button and
release button. Then adjust it to the appropriate height.
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision or hard stop could cause serious injury or
death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely
stow removed head restraints in a location outside
the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the
vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow
the re-installation instructions above prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat.
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the
event of a collision and could result in serious
injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
Folding Rear Seat
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. Pull on the loops located on the
upper part of the rear seatback to fold down either or
both seatbacks. These loops can be tucked away when
not in use.
3
Folded Rear Seat
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
Folding Rear Seat
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper stability for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in a collision. Children should
be seated and using the proper restraint system.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located under the left side
of the instrument panel.
Hood Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle, the safety catch is
located under the center front edge of the hood.
3
Hood Safety Catch
Hood Safety Catch Location
3. Push the safety catch to the left.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6 in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should
(Continued)
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
operation of the headlights, parking lights, instrument
panel lights, instrument panel light dimming, and interior lights.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first detent
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
for parking light and instrument panel light operation.
the instrument panel. This switch controls the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
Rotate the headlight switch to the second detent for Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
headlight, parking light and instrument panel light op- Automatic Headlights Only)
eration.
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
after the wipers are turned on if the headlight switch is
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
placed in the AUTO position and programmable feature
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off
is set to ON. In addition, the headlights will turn off
according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,
when the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by
rotate the headlight switch counterclockwise to the
this feature.
AUTO position. When the system is on, the headlight
time delay feature is also on. This means the headlights NOTE: The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be
will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you place the turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the automatic “Uconnect® Settings/Customer Programmable Feasystem off, move the headlight switch out of the AUTO tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
position.
further information.
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights
will come on in the automatic mode.
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
• To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitivity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam
Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle highbeam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of
ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon
ignition off.
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system
provides increased forward lighting at night by automating high beam control through the use of a digital camera
mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera
detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches
from high beams to low beams until the approaching If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp
vehicle is out of view.
Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed
to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized
NOTE:
dealer.
• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be
To Activate
turned on or off using the Uconnect® System. Refer to
“Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru- 1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight
position.
ment Panel” for further information.
• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights 2. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward
of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to
front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.
remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,
and other obstructions on the windshield or camera NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is
at or above 15 mph (24 km/h).
lens will cause the system to function improperly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
To Deactivate
If you turn the headlights, park lights or ignition switch
ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward
in car) to manually deactivate the system (normal If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will
turn off in the normal manner.
operation of low beams).
2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the NOTE: The Headlight Time Delay is programmable using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings”
system.
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
Headlight Time Delay
information.
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
for up to 90 seconds when leaving your vehicle in an
The Daytime Running Lights will turn On when the
unlit area.
engine is started and remain On unless the headlamps
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
are turned ON, the parking brake is applied, or the
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn off the
engine is shut Off.
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
when the headlight switch is turned off.
NOTE: The lights must be turned off within 45 seconds
of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running Lights can
be turned on and off using the Uconnect® System, refer
to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is placed in the OFF position, a chime will sound to alert
the driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
Multifunction Lever
signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The Turn Signals
multifunction lever is located on the left side of the
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
steering column.
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
NOTE:
High/Low Beam Switch
• If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is
a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is
defective.
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the Drivers lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
Information Display (DID) and a continuous chime will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi released.
(1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-to
Lane Change Assist
pass position for more than 20 seconds, the high beams
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond will shut off.
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
Map/Reading Lights
three times then automatically turn off.
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned on by pressing the
lens. Press the lens a second time to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Interior Lights
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
turned fully upward, past the second detent.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is moved to
the LOCK position. This will occur if the interior lights
were switched on manually or are on because a door is
open. This includes the glove box light and the trunk
light. To restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position or cycle the light
switch.
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer control is part of the headlight switch and is
located on the left side of the instrument panel.
Overhead Console
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
3
Dimmer Controls
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating the left
dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights and lighted cupholders (if
equipped).
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Dome Light Position
Rotate the left dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the left dimmer control to the extreme bottom
“OFF” position. The interior lights will remain off when
the doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the instrument panel dimmer control upward to
the first detent. This feature brightens all text displays
such as the odometer, Driver Information Display (DID),
and radio when the position lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
The multifunction lever operates the windshield
detent past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
wipers and washer when the ignition is placed in
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
the ON/RUN or ACC position. The multifunction
settings for high-speed wiper operation.
lever is located on the left side of the steering column.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper switch is left in
any position other than off.
Mist Feature
Rotate the end of the lever downward to the Mist
position to activate a single wipe cycle to clear off road
mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The wipers will
continue to operate until you release the multifunction
lever.
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause be- windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
tween cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunc- spray the windshield with washer fluid.
tion lever to the first detent position, and then turn the Windshield Washers
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
are four delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
(toward the steering column) and hold it for as long as
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
washer spray is desired.
to a maximum of approximately 36 seconds between
cycles. The delay intervals will double in duration when If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
the vehicle speed is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.
Intermittent Wiper System
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
several wipe cycles after releasing the multifunction lever Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
and then resume the intermittent interval previously Automatic Headlights Only)
selected.
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on
turned off, the wipers will operate for several wipe cycles if the headlight switch is placed in the A (AUTO)
position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when
and then turn off.
the wipers are turned off if they were turned on by this
feature.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
NOTE: For vehicle equipped with rain sensor (auto
wipes), please note that in addition to the 10 seconds, the
headlights can also turn on if the Rain Sensing feature is
ON, and the front wipers complete a minimum of 5 wipe
cycles within 60 seconds.
In this case (auto wipes) the headlights will turn off if no
wipes occurs in 240 Seconds.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be turned on wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 can be used if the driver
and off using the Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for OFF position when not using the system.
further information.
NOTE:
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and
wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.
automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly
feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray
when ice, or dried salt water is present on the windfrom the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
shield.
the end of the multifunction lever to one of four settings
to activate this feature.
• Use of Rain-X® or products containing wax or silicone
may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the
multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the
sensitive, and wiper delay position 4 is the most sensi- wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the
tive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions. following conditions:
Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less
• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is
first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem- This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is
ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEU- located below the steering wheel at the end of the
TRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not steering column.
operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed
is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the shift lever is
moved out of the NEUTRAL position.
NOTE: Rain Sensing can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect® System, refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
To unlock the steering column, pull the lever downward.
To tilt the steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten
the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward or
push it inward as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, push the lever upward until fully engaged.
POWER TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
— IF EQUIPPED
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The power tilt/telescoping
steering column lever is located below the multifunction
lever on the steering column.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
Power Tilt/Telescoping Switch
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To tilt the steering column, move the lever up or down as heated steering wheel can shut off early or may not turn
desired. To lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull on when the steering wheel is already warm.
the lever toward you or push the lever away from you as
The heated steering wheel control button is located
desired.
within the Uconnect® system. You can gain access to the
control button through the climate screen or the controls
WARNING!
screen.
Do not adjust the steering column while driving. Ad- • Press the heated steering wheel button
once to
justing the steering column while driving or driving
turn the heating element ON.
with the steering column unlocked, could cause the
a second
driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to follow • Press the heated steering wheel button
time to turn the heating element OFF.
this warning may result in serious injury or death.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps
warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering
wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for up
to 80 minutes before automatically shutting off. The
NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start, the
heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on
during a remote start through the Uconnect® system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding Your ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Instrument Panel” for further information.
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
WARNING!
(40 km/h).
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise
care when using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering
wheel covers of any type and material. This may
cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
2 — SET+/ACCEL
3 — RESUME
4 — SET-/DECEL
5 — CANCEL
Push the ON/OFF button to activate the electronic speed
control. CRUISE CONTROL READY will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is on. To turn the system off, push the ON/OFF button a
second time. CRUISE CONTROL OFF will appear on the
instrument cluster to indicate the electronic speed control
is off. The system should be turned off when not in use.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (+) or SET
(-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed. Once a speed
has been set a message CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
(km/h) will appear indicating what speed was set. A
CRUISE indicator lamp, along with set speed will also
appear and stay on in the instrument cluster when the
speed is set.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control without erasing the set speed from memory.
Pressing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition
switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET + button.
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Undercontinue to increase until the button is released, then
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
the new set speed will be established.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
To Decrease Speed
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can deU.S. Speed (mph)
crease speed by pushing the SET - button.
• Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Underbutton results in an increase of 1 mph.
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
continue to increase until the button is released, then speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
the new set speed will be established.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
• Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
continue to decrease until the button is released, then speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
the new set speed will be established.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
Control.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
continue to decrease until the button is released, then
the new set speed will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
the original set speed) automatically to maintain a
preset following distance, while matching the speed of
the vehicle ahead.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving
convenience provided by cruise control while traveling The Cruise Control system has two control modes:
on highways and major roadways. However, it is not a
safety system and not designed to prevent collisions. • Adaptive Cruise Control mode for maintaining an
appropriate distance between vehicles.
Electronic Speed Control function performs differently.
Please refer to the proper section within this chapter.
• Normal (fixed speed) cruise control mode is for cruising at a constant preset speed. For additional informaACC will allow you to keep cruise control engaged in
tion, refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
light to moderate traffic conditions without the constant
Mode” in this section.
need to reset your cruise control. ACC utilizes a radar
sensor designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead of you. NOTE: The normal (fixed speed) cruise control will not
react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of the mode
NOTE:
selected.
• If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead of you,
You can change the mode by using the Cruise Control
ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
buttons. The two control modes function differently.
• If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC will Always confirm which mode is selected.
apply limited braking or acceleration (not to exceed
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a convenience
system. It is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, and weather
conditions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to
ensure safe operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always required while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
• The ACC system:
• Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles,
and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
• Cannot take street, traffic, and weather conditions into account, and may be limited upon
adverse sight distance conditions.
• Does not always fully recognize complex driving
conditions, which can result in wrong or missing
distance warnings.
You should switch off the ACC system:
• When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy snow, sleet,
heavy traffic, and complex driving situations (i.e.,
in highway construction zones).
• When entering a turn lane or highway off ramp;
when driving on roads that are winding, icy, snowcovered, slippery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
• When towing a trailer up or down steep slopes.
• When circumstances do not allow safe driving at a
constant speed.
(Continued)
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The speed control buttons (located on the right side of the
steering wheel) operates the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
— NORMAL (FIXED SPEED) CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
— SET+/ACCEL
— RESUME
— SET-/DECEL
— DISTANCE SETTING — INCREASE
— ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF
— DISTANCE SETTING — DECREASE
— CANCEL
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
NOTE: Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifications NOTE: You cannot engage ACC under the following
to the vehicle will effect the performance of the Adaptive conditions:
Cruise Control and Forward Collision Warning System.
• When you apply the brakes.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
• When the parking brake is set.
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is above
• When the automatic transmission is in PARK, RE20 mph (32 km/h).
VERSE or NEUTRAL.
The system will cancel when the vehicle speed drops
• When the Vehicle speed is outside of the speed range.
below 15 mph (24 km/h).
The minimum Set Speed for the ACC system is 20 mph • When the brakes are overheated.
(32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the READY state,
the Driver Information Display (DID) displays “ACC
Ready.”
When the system is OFF, the DID displays “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
• When the ESC is in Full-off mode.
3
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To turn the system OFF, push and release the Adaptive
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF button again. At this
ON/OFF button. The ACC menu in the DID displays time, the system will turn off and the DID will display
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
“ACC Ready.”
To Activate/Deactivate
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go faster than you
want. You could lose control and have a collision.
Always leave the system off when you are not using
it.
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If you do
not, the vehicle may continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed. If this occurs:
• The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the DID.
• The system will not be controlling the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle
speed will only be determined by the position of the
accelerator pedal.
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the To Cancel
SET + button or the SET - button and release. The DID
The following conditions cancel the system:
will display the set speed.
If the system is Set when the vehicle speed is above • The brake pedal is applied.
20 mph (32 km/h), the Set Speed shall be the current • The CANCEL button is pressed.
speed of the vehicle.
• The vehicle speed goes below 15 mph (24 km/h).
• An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event occurs.
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the To Resume
Drive position.
If there is a set speed in memory press the RES (resume)
• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sys- button and then remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal. The DID will display the last set speed.
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs.
• The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in
memory if:
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
ON/OFF button is pressed.
• The ignition is turned off.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if traffic
and road conditions permit. Resuming a set speed
that is too high or too low for prevailing traffic and
road conditions could cause the vehicle to accelerate
or decelerate too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision and
death or serious personal injury.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed by
pressed.
pressing the SET + button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Undercontinue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen
in the DID.
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
To Decrease Speed
U.S. Speed (mph)
While ACC is set, the set speed can be decreased by
• Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph pressing the SET - button.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “ Under• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the The speed decrement shown is dependant on the chosen
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
in the DID.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
• Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
3
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will • When you use the SET - button to decelerate, if the
continue to decrease in 5 mph increments until the
engine’s braking power does not slow the vehicle
button is released. The decrease in set speed is resufficiently to reach the set speed, the brake system
flected in the DID.
will automatically slow the vehicle.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• The ACC system applies the brake down to 15 mph
(24 km/h) when following a target vehicle.
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the • The ACC system maintains set speed when driving up
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
hill and down hill. However, a slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. In addition, downshifting
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
may occur while climbing uphill or descending downcontinue to decrease in 10 km/h increments until the
hill. This is normal operation and necessary to mainbutton is released. The decrease in set speed is retain set speed. When driving up hill and down hill, the
flected in the DID.
ACC system will cancel if the braking temperature
NOTE:
exceeds normal range (overheated).
• When you override and push the SET + button or SET buttons, the new Set Speed will be the current speed of
the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be set by
varying the distance setting between four bars (longest),
three bars (long), two bars (medium) and one bar (short).
Using this distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle ahead. This
distance setting displays in the DID.
3
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
To decrease the distance setting, press the Distance
Setting — Decrease button and release. Each time the
button is pressed, the distance setting decreases by one
bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will maintain the
set speed. If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the DID displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indicator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle speed automatically to maintain the distance setting, regardless of the set
speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance until:
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
• The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above the set
To increase the distance setting, press the Distance Setspeed.
ting — Increase button and release. Each time the button
is pressed, the distance setting increases by one bar • The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or view of
the sensor.
(longer).
• The distance setting is changed.
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The system disengages. (Refer to the information on
ACC Activation).
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited; however, the driver can always apply the brakes manually, if
necessary.
NOTE: The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC predicts
that its maximum braking level is not sufficient to
maintain the set distance. If this occurs, a visual alert
“BRAKE” will flash in the DID and a chime will sound
Brake Alert
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking
NOTE:
The
“Brake!”
Screen
in the DID is a warning for
capacity.
the driver to take action and does not necessarily mean
that the Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Overtake Aid
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When driving with ACC engaged and following a Target
vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration to assist in passing vehicles in front. This additional
acceleration is triggered when the driver utilizes the left
or right turn signal. The Overtake Aid will only provide
additional acceleration if the vehicle moves with the
corresponding turn signal and until the current set speed
is reached. The ACC system will automatically detect
traffic direction in the respective lane when the right or
left turn signal is utilized.
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
Control Ready.”
Press the SET + or the SET- button (located on the
steering wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The instrument cluster.
DID is located in the center of the instrument cluster. The
The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
information it displays depends on ACC system status. activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
Press the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ • System Cancel
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of
• Driver Override
the following displays in the DID:
3
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• System Off
• ACC Proximity Warning
• ACC Unavailable Warning
dirt or ice. In these cases, the DID will display “ACC/
FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” and the
system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
• The DID will return to the last display selected after message can sometimes be displayed while driving in
highly reflective areas (i.e. tunnels with reflective tiles, or
five seconds of no ACC display activity
ice and snow). The ACC system will recover after the
Display Warnings And Maintenance
vehicle has left these areas. Under rare conditions, when
the radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
this warning may temporarily occur.
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor” NOTE: If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
warning will display and also a chime will indicate when Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
conditions temporarily limit system performance.
Control is still available. For additional information refer
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility, such as to “Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may also become
temporarily blinded due to obstructions, such as mud,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver should • Do not attach or install any accessories near the sensor,
examine the sensor. It may require cleaning or removal of
including transparent material or aftermarket grilles.
an obstruction. The sensor is located in the center of the
Doing so could cause an ACC system failure or
vehicle behind the lower grille.
malfunction.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is impor- When the condition that deactivated the system is no
tant to note the following maintenance items:
longer present, the system will return to the “Adaptive
Cruise Control Off” state and will resume function by
• Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
simply reactivating it.
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to damage
the sensor lens.
NOTE:
• Do not remove any screws from the sensor. Doing so • If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
could cause an ACC system malfunction or failure and
Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than
require a sensor realignment.
once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
other obstruction, have the radar sensor realigned at
• If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is damaged due
your authorized dealer.
to a collision, see your authorized dealer for service.
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Installing a snow plow, front-end protector, an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not recommended. Doing so may block the sensor and inhibit
ACC/FCW operation.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the DID displays “ACC/FCW
Unavailable Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required”, there may be an internal system
fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable.
If this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following an
ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see your authorized dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have detection
issues. In these cases, ACC may brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert and may need to
intervene.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that is
offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle merging
in from a side lane. There may not be sufficient distance
to the vehicle ahead. The offset vehicle may move in and
out of the line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
the vehicle is out of the curve the system will resume
your original Set Speed. This is a part of normal ACC
system functionality.
NOTE: On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the system
may decrease the vehicle speed and acceleration for
stability reasons, with no target vehicle detected. Once
Turn Or Bend Example
3
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using ACC On Hills
Lane Changing
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle in
your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load, traffic
conditions, and the steepness of the hills, ACC performance may be limited.
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in the
lane in which you are traveling. In the illustration shown,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing lanes and
it may not detect the vehicle until it’s too late for the ACC
system to take action. ACC may not detect a vehicle until
it is completely in the lane. There may not be sufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
ACC Hill Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer edges of
the lane or edging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved fully into the lane. There may not be
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicle Example
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
General Information
ACC does not react to stationary objects and stationary
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in situations
where the vehicle you are following exits your lane and
the vehicle ahead is stopped in your lane. Always be
attentive and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency
that comply with Part 15 of the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada
Standards RSS- GEN/210/220/310.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. The device may not cause harmful interference.
2. The device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to any of these systems by
other than an authorized service facility could void
authorization to use this equipment.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control
Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a Normal
(Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control mode is available
for cruising at fixed speeds. The Normal (Fixed Speed)
Electronic Speed Control mode is designed to maintain a
set cruising speed without requiring the driver to operate
the accelerator. Electronic Speed Control can only be
operated if the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
WARNING!
In the normal Cruise Control mode, the system will
not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the proximity
warning does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead since
neither the presence of the vehicle ahead nor the
vehicle-to vehicle distance is detected. Be sure to
maintain a safe distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead. Always be aware which mode is
selected.
To change between the different control modes, press the
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/OFF button
which turns the ACC and the NORMAL (Fixed Speed) To Set A Desired Speed
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL OFF. Pressing of the
NORMAL (Fixed Speed) ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTurn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic
TROL ON/OFF button will result in turning ON (changSpeed Control ON. When the vehicle has
ing to) the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Conreached the desired speed, press the SET (+) or
trol mode.
SET (-) button and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Once a speed has been set a message (CRUISE CON- U.S. Speed (mph)
TROL SET TO MPH/KM) will appear indicating what
• Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 mph
speed was set. This light will turn on when the electronic
increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
speed control is SET.
button results in an increase of 1 mph.
To Vary The Speed Setting
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
To Increase Speed
continue to increase in 5 mph increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Conin the DID display.
trol is set, you can increase speed by pressing the SET +
button.
Metric Speed (km/h)
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the • Pressing the SET + button once will result in a 1 km/h
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Underincrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
button results in an increase of 1 km/h.
The speed increment shown is dependant on the speed of
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
continue to increase in 10 km/h increments until the
button is released. The increase in set speed is reflected
in the DID display.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
To Decrease Speed
Metric Speed (km/h)
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control is set, • Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 km/h
you can decrease speed by pressing the SET - button.
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the
button results in a decrease of 1 km/h.
The drivers preferred units can be selected through the
instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under- • If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will
standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.
continue to decrease in 10 km/h decrements until the
The speed decrement shown is dependant on the speed
button is released. The decrease in set speed is reof U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h) units:
flected in the DID display.
U.S. Speed (mph)
To Cancel
• Pressing the SET - button once will result in a 1 mph The following conditions will cancel the Normal (Fixed
decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of the Speed) Electronic Speed Control without clearing the
memory:
button results in a decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pressed, the set speed will • The brake pedal is applied.
continue to decrease in 5 mph decrements until the • The CANCEL button is pressed.
button is released. The decrease in set speed is re• The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control Sysflected in the DID display.
tem (ESC/TCS) activates.
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The vehicle parking brake is applied.
• The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off button is
pressed.
• The braking temperature exceeds normal range (overheated).
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) — IF
• The shift lever/gear selector is removed from the EQUIPPED
Drive position.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Operation
To Resume Speed
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system provides
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES button the driver with audible warnings, visual warnings
and release. Resume can be used at any speed above (within the DID), to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings are intended to
20 mph (32 km/h).
provide the driver with enough time to react, avoid or
To Turn Off
mitigate the potential collision.
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in NOTE: FCW monitors the information from the forward
memory if:
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake Controller
• The Normal (Fixed Speed) Electronic Speed Control (EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision.
When the system determines that a forward collision is
ON/OFF button is pressed.
probable, the driver will be provided with audible and
• The ignition is turned off.
visual warnings.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
When the system determines a collision with the vehicle
in front of you is no longer probable, the warning
message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
• The minimum speed for FCW activation is 5 mph
(10 km/h).
• The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects other than
vehicles such as guard rails or sign posts based on the
course prediction. This is expected and is a part of
normal FCW activation and functionality.
FCW Message
• The FCW system is intended for on-road use only. If
the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW system should
be deactivated to prevent unnecessary warnings to the
surroundings.
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended to
avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW detect
every type of potential collision. The driver has the
responsibility to avoid a collision by controlling the
vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to follow
this warning could lead to serious injury or death.
Turning FCW ON Or OFF
To turn the FCW system back ON, press the forward
collision button again to turn the system ON (led turns
off).
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system
from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front of you.
NOTE: The FCW system state is kept in memory from
one key cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it
will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
NOTE: The default status of FCW is “On”, this allows Changing FCW Status
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the
The FCW Sensitivity Settings are programmable through
vehicle in front of you.
the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in
The forward collision button is located on the switch “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further inpanel below the Uconnect® display.
formation.
To turn the FCW system OFF, press the forward collision The default status of FCW is the “Far” setting is the “On”
button once to turn the system OFF (led turns on).
setting, this allows the system to warn you of a possible
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
collision with the vehicle in front of you when you are Service FCW Warning
farther away. This gives you the most reaction time to If the system turns off, and the DID displays:
avoid a possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows • ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
the system to warn you of a possible collision with the • Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
vehicle in front of you when you are much closer. This
This indicates there is an internal system fault. Although
setting provides less reaction time than the “Far” setting,
the vehicle is still drivable under normal conditions, have
which allows for a more dynamic driving experience.
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
PARKSENSE® REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
• The system will retain the last setting selected by the
EQUIPPED
driver after ignition shut down.
The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist system provides visual
• FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as
and audible indications of the distance between the rear
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects not in the
fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.
path of the car, stationary objects that are far away,
during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense® Sysoncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the same or
tem Usage Precautions” in this section for limitations of
higher rate of speed.
this system and recommendations.
• FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavailable
screens.
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ParkSense® will retain the last system state (enabled or ParkSense® Warning Display
disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is The ParkSense® Warning screen will only be displayed if
changed to the ON/RUN position.
Sound and Display is selected from the Uconnect®
ParkSense® can be active only when the shift lever is in System. Refer to #Uconnect® Settings” in “UnderstandREVERSE. If ParkSense® is enabled at this shift lever ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
position, the system will remain active until the vehicle The ParkSense® Warning screen is located within the
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or Driver Information Display (DID). It provides visual
above. The system will become active again if the vehicle warnings to indicate the distance between the rear
speed is decreased to speeds less than approximately fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to
6 mph (9 km/h).
“Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding
ParkSense® Sensors
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
The four ParkSense® sensors, located in the rear fascia/
bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is
within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect
obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 79 in
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal
direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense® Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display
will turn ON indicating the system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing
a single arc in one or more regions based on the obstacle’s
distance and location relative to the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear region, the
display will show a single solid arc in the center rear
region and will produce a one-half second tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the display will
show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear
region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the
left and/or right rear region and will produce a fast
sound tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle,
the display will show the single arc moving closer to the
vehicle and the sound tone will change from fast, to
continuous.
3
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning
display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous
tone. The following chart shows the warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
3
Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear
Distance
(in/cm)
Audible
Alert
Chime
Arc — Left
Rear
Arc —
Center Rear
Greater
than
79 in
(200 cm)
None
79-59 in
(200-150
cm)
WARNING ALERTS
59-47 in
47-39 in
(150-120
(120-100
cm)
cm)
39-25 in
(100-65 cm)
25-12 in
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 in
(30 cm)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Slow
(for rear
center
only)
Fast
(for rear
center
only)
Fast
Continuous
None
Single 1/2Second
Tone
(for rear
center
only)
None
None
None
None
1st Flashing
None
6th Solid
5th Solid
4th Solid
3rd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
2nd
Flashing
1st Flashing
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
Arc —
Right Rear
Radio
Volume
Reduced
None
None
None
None
None
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
2nd
Flashing
Yes
1st Flashing
Yes
3
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense®
ParkSense® can be enabled and disabled with the
ParkSense® switch, located on the switch panel below
the Uconnect® display.
ParkSense® Switch
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the ParkSense® system is disabled, the
Drivers Information Display (DID) will display
the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Drivers Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. When the shift lever is
moved to REVERSE and the system is disabled, the DID
will display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long
as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
Service The ParkSense® Rear Park Assist
System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense® Rear Park
Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the
instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per
ignition cycle and it will display the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE
WIPE
REAR
SENSORS”
or
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message for five seconds. Refer to “Driver Information
The ParkSense® switch LED will be ON when Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
ParkSense® is disabled or defective. The ParkSense® Panel” for further information.
switch LED will be OFF when the system is enabled. If When the shift lever is moved to REVERSE and the
the ParkSense switch is pressed and the system is dis- system has detected a faulted condition, the Driver
abled or requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will Information Display (DID) will display the
blink momentarily and then the LED will be ON.
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS”
or “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. Under
this condition, ParkSense® will not operate.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SEN- ParkSense® System Usage Precautions
SORS” appears in the Driver Information Display (DID),
NOTE:
make sure the outer surface and the inside of the rear
fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt • Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,
dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense® system operor other obstruction, and then cycle the ignition. If the
ating properly.
message continues to appear see an authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” • Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could
affect the performance of ParkSense® or render the
appears in the DID, see an authorized dealer.
system temporarily unavailable.
Cleaning The ParkSense® System
• When you turn ParkSense® off in DRIVE, the instruClean the ParkSense® sensors with water, car wash soap
ment cluster will display #PARKSENSE OFF# for five
and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not
seconds. Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense® off,
scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damit remains off until you turn it on again, even if you
age the sensors.
cycle the ignition.
• When you move the shift lever to the REVERSE
position and ParkSense® is turned off, the Driver
Information Display (DID) will display “PARKSENSE
OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.
3
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• ParkSense® will reduce the volume of the radio when
it is sounding an audio tone.
CAUTION!
• Clean the ParkSense® sensors regularly, taking care
not to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not
be covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.
Failure to do so can result in the system not working
properly. The ParkSense® system might not detect an
obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide
a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/
bumper.
• ParkSense® is only a parking aid and it is unable to
recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.
Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or below
the sensors will not be detected when they are in
close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
ParkSense® in order to be able to stop in time
when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended
that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense®.
• Ensure the ParkSense® system is OFF if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within
12 inches 30 (cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. Failure
to do so can result in the system misinterpreting a
close object as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message to be displayed in the Driver Information
Display (DID).
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the Rear Park Assist system. Always check
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
WARNING! (Continued)
carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,
or blind spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must continue to pay attention while backing up. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
PARKVIEW® REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF
EQUIPPED
“check entire surroundings” across the top of the screen.
After five seconds this note will disappear.
NOTE: The ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera has programmable modes of operation that may be selected
through the Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect®
Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Camera Delay
feature and it is turned ON, the rear camera image will be
displayed for up to 10 seconds when the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
#PARK# or the vehicle’s ignition is cycled to the OFF
position.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen
image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever
the shift lever/gear selector is put into REVERSE. The
ParkView® camera is located on the rear of the vehicle When the Vehicle is shifted out of Reverse (with camera
above the rear license plate. The image will be displayed delay turned OFF) the rear camera mode is exited and the
in the touchscreen display along with a caution note to last touchscreen appears again.
3
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the Different colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its the vehicle.
projected backup path based on the steering wheel
The following table shows the approximate distances for
position.
each zone:
Zone
Red
Yellow
Green
Distance to the rear of the vehicle
0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
6.5 ft or greater (2 m or greater)
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
Drivers must be careful when backing up even when
using the ParkView® Rear Back Up Camera. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for the safety of your surroundings and
must continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView® should only
be used as a parking aid. The ParkView® camera is
unable to view every obstacle or object in your
drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
driven slowly when using ParkView® to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her
shoulder when using ParkView®.
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights
and sunglass storage. Universal Garage Door Opener
(HomeLink®) button and a power sunroof switch may
also be included, if equipped.
NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,
and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.
Overhead Console
3
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Courtesy/Reading Lights
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
At the forward end of the overhead console are two HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
courtesy/reading lights.
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorPress the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink® unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
to turn off the light.
battery.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, when
the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the overhead
transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control is console designate the three different HomeLink® channels. The HomeLink® indicator is located on the left side
turned fully upward past the second detent.
of the first button.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
The storage compartment access is a #push/push# design.
Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open.
Push on the raised bar to close.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink®
system.
To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink® for the first time. Do not
NOTE: HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secuerase channels when programming additional buttons.
rity Alarm is active.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
before you begin programming.
HomeLink® Buttons
3
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you want to NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
program while you push and hold the hand-held step after the LEARN button has been pushed.
transmitter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indiHomeLink® button twice (holding the button for two
cator light. The HomeLink® indicator will flash slowly
seconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
and then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
activates, programming is complete.
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. ReNOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actilease both buttons after the indicator light changes
vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to
from slow to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink® buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
light in view.
follow these steps:
3. Push and hold the Homelink® button you want to
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
program while you push and hold the hand-held
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
transmitter button.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indinot release the button.
cator light. The Homelink® indicator will flash slowly
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programand then rapidly after HomeLink® has received the
ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Resteps.
lease both buttons after the indicator light changes
from slow to rapid.
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured 5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button
and observe the indicator light.
before 1995.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, program1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
ming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Rolling Code)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons, Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
erase the channels.
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sigTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transmission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink®
follow these steps:
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until time-out in the same manner.
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
not release the button.
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program- door or gate motor.
ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
remaining steps.
3
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8
cm) away from the HomeLink® button you wish to
program while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink® button is pushed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink® buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® button,
while you push and release (“cycle”) your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink® has If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi- programming, plug it back in at this time.
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
fully trained.
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change flash
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
follow these steps:
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage
door may open and close while you are programming. 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® button 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
and observe the indicator light.
not release the button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
3. Without releasing the button proceed with The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled when
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” step 2 and the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
follow all remaining steps.
Troubleshooting Tips
Using HomeLink®
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
To operate, push and release the programmed here are some of the most common solutions:
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for the • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitprogrammed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operater.
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may • Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
also be used at any time.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
Security
remember to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
in your vehicle.
call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at
To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons for 20 HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety
information or assistance.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with
FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the
Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location
accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
(Continued)
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
movement. The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a
partially opened condition until the switch is pushed and
held rearward again.
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any
Opening Sunroof — Express
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automatiPress the switch rearward and release it within one-half cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express
second. The sunroof and sunshade will open automati- Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
cally from any position. The sunroof and sunshade will the sunroof.
open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
Open”. During Express Open operation, any movement
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward closed condition until the switch is pushed and held
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the forward again.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
Pinch Protect Feature
Sunshade Operation
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled. ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
Venting Sunroof — Express
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurPress and release the Vent button within one half second rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is the front windows open, open the front windows tocalled “Express Vent” and it will occur regardless of gether to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunroof Maintenance
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean Your vehicle is equipped with two 12 Volt (13 Amp)
the glass panel.
power outlets that can be used to power cellular phones,
small electronics and other low powered electrical accesIgnition Off Operation
sories.
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is The 12 Volt power outlets have power available at all
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door times. These power outlets can also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit.
will cancel this feature.
NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the NOTE: To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR® cigar
Uconnect® System. Refer to “Uconnect® Settings/ knob and element must be used.
Customer Programmable Features” in “Understanding The front power outlet is located next to the storage area
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
on the integrated center stack of the instrument panel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207
3
Power Outlet — Integrated Center Stack Front
Power Outlet — Center Console
NOTE: All accessories connected to these powered outlets should be removed or turned off when the vehicle is
not in use to protect the battery against discharge.
208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Power Outlet Fuse Locations
1 — #12 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Integrated Center Stack
2 — #38 Fuse 20A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts (13
Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp) power
rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
alternator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
(Continued)
3
210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
Rear Cupholders
Front Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while maintaining a resting place for the rear occupant’s elbows.
The front cupholders are located in the center console.
Front Cupholders
Rear Cupholders
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the passenger side
of the instrument panel.
3
Opened Glove Compartment
Console Storage
Glove Compartment
The center console has a storage compartment located
underneath the armrest. The compartment contains a 12
Volt power outlet, and a molded-in coin holder (designed
to hold various size coins). The center console may also
be equipped with a Universal Consumer Interface (UCI).
212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UCI supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod® and
iPhone® devices. Refer to “Universal Consumer Interface
(UCI) — If Equipped” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving with the
console compartment lid open may result in injury in
a collision.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Defroster
Center Console
The rear window defroster button is located on
the climate control (Mode) knob. Press this button
to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button
will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The
rear window defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of
operation, press the button a second time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
3
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
! INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .218 ! Uconnect® SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
! INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SRT . . . . . . . . . . .219
▫ Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
! INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SRT . . . . . . . . . . .220
▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
! INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .221
▫ Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
8.4 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .251
! DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) . . . . .230
▫ Engine Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
▫ Cruise Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
▫ DID Yellow Telltales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
▫ DID Red Telltales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
▫ DID Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
▫ Guidelines For Race Track Use Of Your SRT . . .272
▫ SRT Performance Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
▫ SRT Drive Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Race Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .299
▫ Valet Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
4
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ ECO Mode — If Equipped With Automatic
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .305
! Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .306
! iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
! STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
▫ Media Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
! RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES . .308
▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . .309
! CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
▫ General Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .311
▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .318
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
! Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK
TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
▫ Introducing Uconnect® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .327
▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328
▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
▫ Uconnect® Access* (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . .331
▫ Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .332
▫ SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . .335
▫ Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
▫ Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .334
4
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
— Air Outlets
— Instrument Cluster
— Glove Box
— Media Center
5 — Keyless Start/Stop Button
6 — Trunk Release Button
7 — Headlight Switch
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SRT
4
Instrument Cluster For SRT 6.4L
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — SRT
Instrument Cluster For SRT 6.2L Supercharged
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
1. Tachometer
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
engine revolutions per minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the red not require towing.
area. The transition of the red line starts 500 RPM prior to
the actual redline. 6.2L SC redline = 6250 RPM and 6.4L
CAUTION!
redline = 6400 RPM.
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
2. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of control system. It also could affect fuel economy and
an onboard diagnostic system called OBD. The driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
OBD system monitors engine and automatic converter damage and power loss will soon occur.
transmission control systems. The MIL will turn on when Immediate service is required.
the ignition is in the ON/RUN position before engine
start. If the MIL does not come on when turning the key
from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
4
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you
drive slowly or park over flammable substances such
as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or
others.
3. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
4. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn
signal when the turn signal lever is operated.
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn
signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either
indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds, when the vehicle security 5. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
until the vehicle is disarmed.
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay
on for as long as four seconds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally
if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
6. Driver Information Display (DID) Area
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If he/she
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
the odometer must be reset at zero.
The odometer display shows the total distance the vehicle has been driven. The trip odometer shows indi- The DID features an interactive display, for further
vidual trip mileage.
information refer to “Driver Information Display (DID).”
4
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
7. Gear Status Indicator — Automatic Transmission 9. Brake Warning Light
Only
This light monitors various brake functions,
The Gear Status Indicator is self-contained within the
including brake fluid level and parking brake
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
application. If the brake light turns on it may
automatic transmission.
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the
brake
fluid
level is low, or that there is a problem with
8. Seat Belt Reminder Light
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
a bulb check when the ignition switch is first disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
placed in ON/RUN. A chime will sound if the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The hydraulic system malfunction. In this case, the light will
Seat Belt Warning Light will flash or remain on continuremain on until the condition has been corrected.
ously if the driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled after the
bulb check or when driving. Refer to “Occupant Re- The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacstraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Ve- ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
hicle” for further information.
indicated by the Brake Warning Light which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers which change fluid level condi- Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for apthe brake fluid level checked.
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesunless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
sary.
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
4
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
10. Air Bag Warning Light
13. High Beam Indicator
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
This indicator will turn on when the high beam
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
headlights are on. Push the multifunction lever
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns high beam.
on while driving, have the system inspected at an autho- 14. Park/Headlight ON Indicator
rized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
This indicator will illuminate when the park
Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
lights or headlights are turned on.
Vehicle” for further information.
11. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
12. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
15. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
16. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range for a fully
warm vehicle should be 200 F - 230 F which indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H,” and you hear a chime, turn the
engine OFF immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to “Maintaining Your Vehicle”
and follow the warnings under the Cooling System
Pressure Cap paragraph.
17. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
4
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
tires).
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when approximately one minute and then remain continuously
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subseAccordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi- quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the syspossible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has to continue to function properly.
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your
sensor function checked.
18. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
With Drive Modes the ESC OFF indicator will
be lit any time the Traction modes is set to Sport, Track or
Full OFF.
19. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
4
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the The Driver Information Display (DID) features an interproblem diagnosed and corrected.
active display which is located in the instrument cluster.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will come
on momentarily each time the ignition switch is
turned to ON/RUN.
• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be ON, even if it was turned off
previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESC becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESC activation.
Driver Information Display (DID) Display
This system conveniently allows the driver to select a
variety of useful information by pushing the arrow
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
buttons located on the left side of the steering wheel. The The system allows the driver to select information by
DID Menu Items consists of the following:
pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Performance
4
• Driver Assist — If Equipped
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Audio
• Messages
• Screen Setup
• Speed Warning — If Equipped
• Diagnostics — If Equipped
• Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) — If Equipped
DID Controls
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Up And Down Arrow Buttons:
• Main menu and submenu’s wrap for continuous
scrolling.
Using the Up or Down arrows allows you to
cycle through the Main Menu Items.
• Upon returning to a main menu, the last submenu
screen viewed within that main menu will be disChanges the Main Screen area and Menu Title
played.
area.
OK Button:
For Digital Speedometer
Left And Right Arrow Buttons:
• Pushing the OK button changes units (MPH or km/h).
Using the Left or Right arrow buttons allows For Screen Setup and Vehicle Settings:
you to cycle through the submenu items of the
• OK button allows user to enter menu and submenus.
Main menu item.
NOTE:
• Within each submenu layer, the up/down arrows will
allow the user to select the item of interest.
• Holding the Up/Down or Left/Right arrow
buttons will loop the user through the cur- • Pushing the OK button makes the selection and a
confirmation screen will appear (returning the user to
rently selected menu or options presented
the 1st page of the submenu).
on the screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
• Pushing the left arrow button will exit each submenu Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. To
layer and return to the main menu.
turn off the message temporarily, push and release the
For the Trip and Fuel Economy menus (and new PerforOK button. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
mance Timers):
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
• Information is reset by pushing and holding the OK following procedure.
button.
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Engine Oil Life Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
START/STOP button and place the ignition to the
ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message 2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
will display in the DID for five seconds after a single
within 10 seconds.
chime has sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE
change interval. The engine oil change indicator system
START/STOP button once to return the ignition to the
is duty cycle based, which means the engine oil change
OFF/LOCK position.
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
Oil Change Required
4
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you 2. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to scroll
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
downward through the main menu to “ Vehicle Info.”
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
3. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to access
Secondary Method Of Navigating To The Oil Life
the ”Oil Life” screen.
Screen In The DID And Holding Ok
4. Push and hold the OK button until the “ Oil Life”
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
screen displays.
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the DID display for approximately 10 5. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to select “
Yes,” then push and release the OK button to select
seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the
reset of the Oil Life.
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the 6. Push and release the Up arrow button to exit the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent
submenu screen.
upon your personal driving style.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
Use the steering wheel DID controls for the following start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
procedure(s):
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the ignition in
the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
Cruise Control
This area will show reconfigurable white caution telltales. These telltales include:
• Service Forward Collision Warming — If Equipped
This light warns the driver of a potential collision with the vehicle in front and prompts the
driver to take action in order to avoid the
• Cruise Ready
collision. For further information, refer to
This telltale will illuminate white to indicate “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Understanding
that the Adaptive Cruise Control system is The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
activated.
• Windshield Washer Fluid Low Indicator
• Electronic Speed Control SET
This telltale will turn on to indicate the windThis telltale will illuminate green when the
shield washer fluid is low.
electronic speed control is SET. For further
information, refer to “Electronic Speed Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your • Service Adaptive Cruise Control — If Equipped
Vehicle.”
This light will turn on when a ACC is not
operating and needs service. For further inforDID Yellow Telltales
mation, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
This area will show reconfigurable amber caution tell(ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of
tales. These telltales include:
Your Vehicle.”
4
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle
has lost power steering assistance. Refer to “Power
This telltale will turn on to indicate that the
Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further
LaneSense Departure has detected a failure.
information.
• LaneSense Failure Telltale
• Service AWD Indicator
This telltale will turn on to indicate the All
Wheel Drive (AWD) system is not functioning
properly and that service is required.
DID Red Telltales
NOTE:
• Even if power steering assistance is no longer operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle. Under
these conditions there will be a substantial increase in
steering effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds
and during parking maneuvers.
This area will show reconfigurable red caution telltales. • If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
service.
These telltales include:
• Power Steering System Over Temperature — If
Equipped
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” message
and a steering wheel icon are displayed on the
DID screen, it indicates that the vehicle needs
• Door Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate that one or
more doors may be ajar.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
• Decklid Ajar
This light will turn on to indicate the decklid
may be ajar.
• Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
• Oil Pressure Warning Light
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is system. OBTAIN SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an austarted. If the light turns on while driving, stop the thorized dealer.
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies.”
on.
• Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light informs you of a problem with the
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. The
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
light will come on when the ignition is first
turned ON and remain on briefly as a bulb
check. If the light does not come on during starting, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer.
4
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If a problem is detected, the light will come on while the • Air Bag Warning Light
engine is running. Cycle the ignition key when the
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
vehicle has completely stopped and the shift lever is
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
placed in the PARK position. The light should turn off.
turned to the ON/RUN position. If the light is
If the light remains lit with the engine running, your
either not on during starting, stays on, or turns
vehicle will usually be drivable. However, see an autho- on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If the light is rized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant
flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your
required. You may experience reduced performance, an Vehicle” for further information.
elevated/rough idle or engine stall, and your vehicle • Speed Limit Warning Light
may require towing.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow
• Oil Temperature Warning Light
button until the Speed Limit Warning Menu
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is
icon/title is highlighted in the DID. Push and
high. If the light turns on while driving, stop
release OK to enter speed warning. Use UP or
the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as DOWN arrow to select a desired speed, then push and
possible.
release OK to set the speed. The Manual Speed Assist
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
(MSA) Speed Warning telltale will display in the DID,
and a chime will sound with a pop up warning message
when the set speed is exceeded.
• Transmission Temperature Warning Light
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
This light indicates that there is excessive transmission fluid temperature that might occur
with severe usage such as trailer towing. It may
also occur when operating the vehicle in a high
torque converter slip condition. If this light comes on, DID Selectable Menu Items
stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or faster with Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow buttons until
the transmission in NEUTRAL until the light goes off.
the desired Selectable Menu item is displayed in the DID.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
Follow the Menu or submenu prompts as desired.
Speedometer
Push and release the LEFT or RIGHT arrow button to
toggle between the Speedometer display type.
4
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Info
Engine Torque
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Vehicle Info menu is highlighted in the DID. Push and
release the RIGHT arrow buttons to enter the submenu
items of Vehicle Info. Follow the directional prompts to
access or reset any of the following Vehicle Info submenu
items:
Engine Power
Tire Pressure Monitor
Performance Features
Coolant Temp
Trans Temp
Oil Temp
Oil Pressure
Oil Life
Battery Voltage
Intake Air Temp
Air-Fuel Ratio — 6.2L Supercharged
Boost Pressure — 6.2L Supercharged
Intercooler Water Temp — 6.2L Supercharged
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Performance Features is intended for off-highway or offroad use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
(Continued)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
WARNING! (Continued)
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer
• 1/8 Mile (200 meters)Timer
– Best
– Last
Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “ Under– Current
standing Your Instrument Panel” for Main Menu/SubMenu selectable items and navigation.
– Reaction Timer
The Performance Features include the following:
• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer
• 0-100 mph (0-161 km/h) Timer
– Best
• 1/4 Mile (400 meters)Timer
– Best
– Last
– Current
– Reaction Timer
• Braking Distance
– Distance
– From Speed
4
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Current G-Forces
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph
(100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds.
• Lap Timer
• To clear the vehicle’s best, last, and current 0-60 mph
(0-100 km/h) time, push and hold the OK button for
two seconds.
• Peak G-Forces
• Lap History
– Will list the last 5 lap with the best lap highlighted 0 to 100 mph (0 to 161 km/h)
in green.
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
• Top Speed
the vehicle to go from 0 to 100 mph (0 to 161 km/h)
within 20 seconds.
The following describes each feature and its operation:
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
conditions are met for the event to begin.
the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h) within
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 0 to
10 seconds.
100 mph (0 to 161 km/h) in less then 20 seconds.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at
0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when
conditions are met for the event to begin.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
• To clear the vehicle’s best, last and current 0 to 1/4 Mile (400 Meters)
100 mph (0 to 161 km/h) time, push and hold the OK When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the
button for two seconds.
vehicle to travel 1/4 mile within 25 seconds and the
vehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/4 mile (200 meters).
1/8 Mile (200 Meters)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the • The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph
vehicle to travel 1/8 mile within 15 seconds and the
(0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when condivehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/8 mile.
tions are met for the event to begin.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph • Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/4
(0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when condimile (400 meters) in less then 25 seconds.
tions are met for the event to begin.
• To clear the vehicle’s best 1/4 mile 400 meters) run,
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/8
push and hold the OK button for two seconds.
mile (200 meters) in less then 15 seconds.
Braking Distance
• To clear the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile (200 meters) run, When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking
push and hold the OK button for five seconds.
distance, and the speed at which the brake pedal was
depressed.
4
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• This feature will only function when applying the Peak G-Force
brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
• Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature. values (two lateral and two longitudinal).
• The word “READY” will display when conditions are • When a force greater than zero is measured, the
display will update the value as it climbs. As the
met for the event to begin.
G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.
• The distance and speed measurements display while
• Push and hold the OK button to clear the peak force
the event is taking place.
values.
• The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a com- Lap Timer
plete stop.
When selected, the Lap Timer page will show the timer
• Pushing and holding the OK button will clear the always at 0:00.00 with the previous Best and Last time
data (unless the driver has cleared it via hold to Reset).
current and last run values.
Current G-Force
• Pushing OK will start “current” timer from 0:00.0.
When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force • When OK is pushed, the times are updated accordingly.
(lateral and longitudinal) that displays the directions of
the forces.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
• As soon as the driver exits the Lap Timer pages, the • Each time the driver presses the OK button (while on
“current” timer will stop and the time will be reset to
the Lap Timer page) the current Lap Time populates
0:00.00.
the 1st spot and the rest of the data shifts down.
• If the driver stays on the Lap Timer pages, the “cur- • Color will indicate the time that is the best time from
rent” timer will reset to 0:00.0 when ignition is placed
the Timer Page.
in the off position, or ignition placed in the ON
• Holding the OK button only resets the page you are
position (or will roll over at 59:59.99 if ever possible).
on.
• Each time the driver pushes OK for a Lap that current
• Lap History page is a static display of lap times only.
time populates, the Last time and also populates the
1st (top) space on the Timer History page the current Top Speed
time resets to 0:00.0 at every push of the OK button. When selected, this screen displays the Top Speed since
• The timer will stop when the driver navigates away last reset:
from this page.
• Populates a top speed from first drive cycle and every
time that speed is exceeded that number is stored here
Lap History
unless/until the driver resets the screen.
When selected, this screen displays the Lap History, and
will color highlight the time that is the best time from the • Latching over ignition cycles.
Timer Page.
• Units will change with the global change in units.
4
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Driver Assist
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
Push the SET + or the SET- button (located on the steering
wheel) and the following will display in the DID:
ACC SET
The DID displays the current ACC system settings. The
information displayed depends on ACC system status.
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in the
Push the ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) ON/ instrument cluster.
OFF button (located on the steering wheel) until one of The ACC screen may display once again if any ACC
activity occurs, which may include any of the following:
the following displays in the DID:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
• Distance Setting Change
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read “Adap- •
tive Cruise Control Off.”
•
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
•
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed setting has •
not been selected, the display will read “Adaptive Cruise
•
Control Ready.”
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
• The DID will return to the last display selected after
five seconds of no ACC display activity.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle.”
– Average MPG (or L/100 km)
– The Max and Min values will correspond to the
particular engine requirements
LaneSense — If Equipped
• Lower end of gauge will be displayed in an amber
color and turn green as Fuel Economy improves.
The DID displays the current LaneSense system settings.
The information displayed depends on LaneSense sys- • MPG will have the gauge fill from the left (clockwise).
tem status and the conditions that need to be met. For
further information, refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped” • L/100 km will have the gauge fill from the right
(counter clockwise).
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle.”
• Hold OK to reset average fuel economy information.
Fuel Economy
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Fuel Economy Menu item is highlighted in the DID.
• Two sub menu pages one with Current value displayed and one without the Current Value displayed:
– Current MPG (or L/100 km)
– Range (miles or km)
4
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
feature shows the number of stored warning messages.
Pushing the RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
what the stored messages are.
the Trip Menu item is highlighted in the DID (Toggle left
or right to select Trip A or Trip B). The Trip information Screen Setup
will display the following:
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Screen Setup Menu displays in the DID. Push and
• Distance
release the OK button to enter the sub-menus. The Screen
• Average Fuel Economy
Setup feature allows you to change what information is
displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the location
• Elapsed Time
that information is displayed.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Diagnostics — If Equipped
Audio
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the diagnostic Menu is selected. Then, the Driver is able
the Audio Menu displays in the DID.
to view engine and emission vehicle faults.
Stored Messages
• Push OK to have the most recent fault code sent.
Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button until
the Messages Menu item is highlighted in the DID. This
Trip Info
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
• There is a delay when the next diagnostic code is Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) – If Equipped
requested during which the following message is The Performance Shift Indicator (PSI) is enabled on
displayed:
vehicles with manual transmission, or when a vehicle
with automatic transmission is in manual shift mode. The
• “Checking System for Diagnostic Codes.”
PSI provides the driver with a visual indication within
• Driver must push the OK button again to see the next the DID display when the driver configured gear shift
Pcode otherwise current message remains displayed. point has been reached and the driver is still accelerating.
• Driver exits when they cycle to another submenu (up This indication notifies the driver to change gear corresponding to the configured RPMs in the head unit. When
or down).
the shift up indicator is shown on the display, the PSI is
• Faults are displayed from newest to the oldest.
advising the driver to engage a higher gear.
• If the menu is exited before the end of codes is reached The PSI indicator in the DID display remains illuminated
- when the driver re-enters the list will be restarted until the driver changes gear, or the driving conditions
from the beginning.
return to a situation where changing gear is not required,
• When no codes are present or the last code is reached corresponding to the configured RPMs in the head unit.
= (P0000) and this message is displayed:
• “No Further or End of Diagnostic Codes.”
4
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Uconnect® SETTINGS
The Uconnect® system uses a combination of buttons on
the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on
the center of the instrument panel that allows you to
access and change the customer programmable features.
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On Touchscreen And
Buttons On Faceplate
1 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect® Buttons On The Faceplate
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect®
system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right
side. Turn the control knob to scroll through menus and
change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the center of the
control knob one or more times to select or change a
setting (i.e., ON, OFF).
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect® display.
Your Uconnect® system may also have a Screen Off and
Back buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn off the
Uconnect® screen. Push the Screen Off button on the
faceplate a second time to turn the screen on.
Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect®
8.4 Settings
Press the “SRT & Apps” button on the touchscreen, then
press the “settings” button on the touchscreen to display
the menu setting screen. In this mode the Uconnect®
system allows you to access programmable features that
may be equipped such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock,
Safety & Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off Options,
Audio, Phone/Bluetooth®, SiriusXM Setup, Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data and System Information.
Push the Back button on the faceplate to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect® system.
NOTE:
• Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a time.
4
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Depending on the vehicles options, feature settings • Display Mode
may vary.
When in this display you may select one of the auto
When making a selection, press the button on the touch- display settings. To change Mode status, press and rescreen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired lease the “Manual” or “Auto” button on the touchscreen.
mode, press and release the preferred setting until a Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display
setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,
Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause
either press the Back Arrow button on the touchscreen to
the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control
return to the previous menu, or press the “X” button on
even though the headlights are on.
the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the • Display Brightness With Headlights ON
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
available settings.
the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
Display
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen
touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the
the following settings will be available:
touchscreen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
NOTE: To make changes to the #Display Brightness with • Set Theme — If Equipped
Headlights ON# setting, the headlights must be on and
This feature will allow you to choose a theme for the
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the #party# or
display screen. The theme will change the background
#parade# positions.
color, highlight color, and button color of the display
• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
screen.
When in this display, you may select the brightness with
the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and
“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any
point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the
touchscreen. Then press the back arrow button on the
touchscreen.
• Set Language
When in this display, you may select one of multiple
languages (English / Français / Español) for all display
nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language
button on the touchscreen, then press the desired lanNOTE: To make changes to the #Display Brightness with guage button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
Headlights OFF# setting, the headlights must be off and appears next to the language, showing that setting has
the interior dimmer switch must not be in the #party# or been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touch#parade# positions.
screen to return to the previous menu.
4
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Touchscreen Beep
When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the
sound heard when a touchscreen button (button on the
touchscreen) is pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep”
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.
• Control Screen Time-Out — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will
stay open for five seconds before the screen times out.
With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open
until it is manually closed. Press the Control Screen
Time-Out button on the touchscreen until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions
will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a
designated turn within a programmed route. To make
your selection, press the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In
Cluster” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
Units
After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you
may select each unit of measure independently displayed
in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation
system (if equipped). The following selectable units of
measure are listed below:
• Speed
Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
• Distance
Select from: “mi” or “km.”
• Fuel Consumption
After the desired setting has been selected, press the back
arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
Voice
Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or
After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the
“km/L.”
following settings will be available:
• Pressure
• Voice Response Length
Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”
• Temperature
Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”
• Power
Select from: “HP” (US), “HP” (UK), and “kW.”
• Torque
Select from: “lb-ft” or “Nm.”
When in this display, you may change the Voice Response Length settings. To change the Voice Response
Length, press the “Brief” or “Detailed” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
• Show Command List
When in this display, you may change the Show Command List settings. To change the Show Command List
4
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
settings, press the “Always,” “With Help” or “Never”
button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.
• Set Time Hours
• Sync Time With GPS
This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The
“Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
return to the previous menu.
This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync
time with GPS” button on the touchscreen must be
unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”
buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or
Clock
down. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to
After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the return to the previous menu.
following settings will be available:
• Set Time Minutes
This feature will allow you to automatically have the
radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press
the “Sync time with GPS” button on the touchscreen until
a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that
setting has been selected. Press the back arrow button on
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Time Format
This feature will allow you to select the time format
display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the 12hrs • Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped
or 24hrs setting, showing that setting has been selected.
The Front Collision Warning (FCW) feature provides an
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
audible and/or visual warning to potential forward
to the previous menu.
collisions. The feature can be can be set to Far, or set to
• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped
Near. The default status of FCW is the Far setting. This
means the system will warn you of a possible collision
This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the
with the vehicle in front of you when you are farther
digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time
away. This gives you the most reaction time. To change
Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button
the setting for more dynamic driving, select the Near
on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to
setting. This warns you of a possible collision when you
setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press
are much closer to the vehicle in front of you. To change
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
the FCW status, press and release the “Near” or “Far”
previous menu or press the “X” button on the touchbutton. Then press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
screen.
Safety & Driving Assistance
For further information, refer to “Adaptive Cruise ConAfter pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button trol (ACC)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail- Vehicle”.
able:
4
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
lane departures. The LDW sensitivity can be set to
provide either an “Early,” “Medium,” or “Late” warning
The FCW system includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA).
zone start point.
When this feature is selected, the ABA applies additional
brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient For further information, refer to “LaneSense Warning
brake pressure to avoid a potential frontal collision. The (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your VeABA system becomes active at 5 mph (8 km/h). To make hicle”.
your selection, press the “Forward Collision Warning
• LaneSense Strength — If Equipped
Active Braking” button on the touchscreen, until a checkmark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting When this feature is selected, it sets the strength of the
had been selected. Press the back arrow button on the steering wheel feedback for potential lane departures.
touchscreen to return to the previous menu. For further The amount of directional torque the steering system can
information, refer to “Forward Collision Warning (FCW) apply to the steering wheel to correct for vehicle lane
With Mitigation” in “Understanding The Features Of departure can be set at “Low,” “Medium” or “High.”
Your Vehicle.”
For further information, refer to “Lane Departure Warn• LaneSense Warning — If Equipped
ing (LDW)” in “Understanding The Features Of Your
Vehicle”.
When this feature is selected, it sets the distance at which
the steering wheel will provide feedback for potential
• Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — Active Braking
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
ParkSense® status, press and release the “Sound Only”
or “Sound and Display” button. Then press the back
The Steering Feel Options feature will allow you to adjust
arrow button on the touchscreen. Refer to “ParkSense®”
the steering effort and feel. Press the “Sport” button on
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for
the touchscreen to provide the greatest amount of steersystem function and operating information.
ing feel, requiring the highest amount of steering effort.
Press the “Normal” button on the touchscreen to provide • Front ParkSense® Volume
greater steering feel, requiring greater steering effort.
The Front ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be
Press the “Comfort” button on the touchscreen to provide
selected from the DID or Uconnect® System. The chime
a balance of steering feel and steering effort. Press the volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make
previous menu.
your selection, press the “Front ParkSense® Vol.” button
• Steering Feel Options — If Equipped
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
The ParkSense® system will scan for objects behind the
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
vehicle when the transmission shift lever is in REVERSE
to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last
and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph (18 km/h). It
known configuration state through ignition cycles.
will provide an alert (audible and/or visual) to indicate
the proximity to other objects. The system can be enabled
with Sound Only, or Sound and Display. To change the
• ParkSense®
4
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mirrors in Reverse” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the
The Rear ParkSense® Chime Volume settings can be
setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on
selected from the DID or Uconnect® System. The chime
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH. The
factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To make • Blind Spot Alert
your selection, press the “Rear ParkSense® Vol.” button When this feature is selected, the Blind Spot Alert feature
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
Provides alerts, visual and/or audible, to indicate objects
setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.
in your blind spot. The Blind Spot Alert feature can be
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return activated in “Lights” mode. When this mode is selected,
to the previous menu. ParkSense® will retain its last the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM) system is activated and
known configuration state through ignition cycles.
will only show a visual alert in the exterior mirrors.
• Rear ParkSense® Volume
• Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse
When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview
mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the
RUN position and the transmission shift lever is in the
REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their
previous position when the transmission is shifted out of
REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Side
When “Lights & Chime” mode is activated, the Blind
Spot Monitor (BSM) will show a visual alert in the
exterior mirrors as well as an audible alert when the turn
signal is on. When “Off” is selected, the Blind Spot
Monitor (BSM) system is deactivated. To change the
Blind Spot Alert status, press the “Off,” “Lights” or
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
“Lights & Chime” button on the touchscreen. Then press button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
the back arrow button on the touchscreen.
next to setting, indicating that the setting had been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
NOTE: If your vehicle has experienced any damage in
to return to the previous menu.
the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is
not damaged, the sensor may have become misaligned. • ParkView® Backup Camera Delay
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera
alignment. Having a sensor that is misaligned will result
delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and
in the BSM not operating to specification.
the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the
• ParkView® Backup Camera Active Guidelines
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay
turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines
Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView® Rear
will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of
Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see
“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds
active guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera
8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
display whenever the shift lever is put into REVERSE.
“PARK” or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
The image will be displayed on the radio touchscreen
To set the ParkView® Backup Camera Delay press the
display along with a caution note to “check entire sur“Controls” button on the touchscreen, the “settings”
roundings” across the top of the screen. After five secbutton on the touchscreen, then the “Safety & Driving
onds, this note will disappear. To make your selection,
Assistance” button on the touchscreen. Press the
press the “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines”
4
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Parkview Backup Camera Delay” button on the touch- setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button on
screen to turn the ParkView® Delay ON or OFF.
the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers
When this feature is selected, the system will automatically activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture
on the windshield. To make your selection, press the
“Rain Sensing Auto Wipers” button on the touchscreen,
until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that
the setting had been selected. Press the back arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
Lights
After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the
following settings will be available.
• Headlight Off Delay
When this feature is selected, it allows adjustment of the
amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine
is shut off. To change the Headlights Off Delay setting,
press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select
• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped
your desired time interval, and choose either 0 sec, 30 sec,
When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA) 60 sec or 90 seconds. Press the back arrow button on the
system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the
System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function back button on the faceplate.
and operating information. To make your selection, press • Headlight Illumination On Approach
the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen, until a
check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter. To change the Illuminated Approach status,
press the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen to select
your desired time interval. Press the back arrow button
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or
push the back button on the faceplate.
• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is
in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.
The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are
turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make
your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next
to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
to the previous menu, or push the back button on the
faceplate.
• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights
will activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High
Beams” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark
appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has
been selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu, or push the back
button on the faceplate. Refer to “Lights — If Equipped”
in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for
further information.
• Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
When this feature is selected, the headlights will turn on
whenever the engine is running. To make your selection,
press the “Daytime Running Lights” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting, indicating that the setting has been selected. Press the back
4
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous Doors & Locks
menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touchscreen the following settings will be available:
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the hazard lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the
passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with
or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To
make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu, or push the back button
on the faceplate.
• Auto Unlock On Exit
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when
the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock On Exit”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to the setting, showing that the setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
• Flash Lights With Lock
When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash
when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, or when using the
passive entry feature. This feature may be selected with
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To
make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”
button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears
next to setting, indicating that the setting has been
selected. Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen
to return to the previous menu.
• Sound Horn With Lock
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the door locks are activated. To make your selection,
press either the “Off,” “1st Press,” or “2nd Press” button
on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu.
• Sound Horn With Remote Start
When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when
the remote start is activated. To make your selection,
press the “Sound Horn with Remote Start” button on the
touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
When #Driver Door# is selected with 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, only the driver’s door will unlock with the first
press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
UNLOCK button. You must press the RKE transmitter
UNLOCK button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors.
When #All Doors# is selected for 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks, all doors will unlock on the first press of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button.
4
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob
Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors will unlock no matter
which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the
driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press
Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed,
touching the handle more than once will only result in
the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected,
once the driver door is opened, the interior door lock/
unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use
RKE transmitter).
setting, showing that the setting has been selected. Press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
previous menu. Refer to “Keyless Enter-N-Go™” in
“Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle”.
• Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob On/Off — If
Equipped
This feature provides automatic recall of all settings
stored to a memory location (driver’s seat, exterior
mirrors, steering column position and radio station presets) to enhance driver mobility when entering and
exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press the
“Personal Settings Linked to Key Fob” button on the
• Passive Entry
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to setting,
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
(RKE) transmitter LOCK or UNLOCK buttons. To make menu, or push the back button on the faceplate.
your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the
touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat
location (if Recall Memory with Remote Key Unlock is set
to ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
is used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory
Seat” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”
for further information.
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
Vehicle Start” button to select from “Off,” “Remote Start”
or “All Starts” until a check-mark appears next to setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Press the back
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
menu.
Engine Off Options
After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the • Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will
• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering
automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.
Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped
To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seat” button
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to
heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when setting, showing that setting has been selected. Press the
temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera- back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will previous menu.
turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto-On
Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With
4
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Delay status press the “+” or “–” button on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval. Press the back
When this feature is selected, the power window
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
switches, radio, Uconnect® Phone system (if equipped),
menu.
DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if
equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to Audio
10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the
either front door will cancel this feature. To change the following settings will be available.
Engine Off Power Delay setting, press the “+” or “-”
button on the touchscreen to select your desired time • Balance/Fade
interval, and choose from “0 seconds,” “45 seconds,” “5 This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade
minutes” or “10 minutes.” Press the back arrow button settings. Press and drag the speaker icon, use the arrows
on the touchscreen to return to the previous menu.
to adjust, or tap the ‘C’ icon to readjust to the center. Press
the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
• Headlight Off Delay
previous menu.
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds • Equalizer
• Engine Off Power Delay
when exiting the vehicle. To change the Headlight Off This feature allows you to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble
settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–” setting
buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.” Press the
touchscreen. Press the back arrow button on the touch- back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
screen to return to the previous menu.
previous menu.
NOTE: Bass/Mid/Treble allow you to simply slide your • AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped
finger up or down to change the setting as well as press This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level
directly on the desired setting.
for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
• Speed Adjusted Volume
To make your selection, press the AUX Volume Match
button on the touchscreen, choose a level from –3 to +3.
This feature increases or decreases volume relative to
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return
vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume
to the previous menu.
press the “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” button on the touchscreen.
Press the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return • Loudness — If Equipped
to the previous menu.
Loudness improves sound quality at lower volumes. To
make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on the
touchscreen, then choose “Yes” or “No.” Press the back
This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.
arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the previous
To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”
menu.
• Surround Sound — If Equipped
4
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone/Bluetooth®
SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth®” button on the After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touchtouchscreen the following settings will be available:
screen, the following settings will be available:
• Paired Phones
• Channel Skip
This feature shows which phones are paired to the SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make
your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the
• Paired Audio Sources
touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip
This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the followed by pressing the back arrow button on the
Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer touchscreen.
to the Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
• Subscription Information
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free
limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
with your radio. Following the expiration of the free
services, it will be necessary to access the information on
the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen select “Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the
settings are restored, a pop up appears stating #settings
to access the Subscription Information screen.
reset to default.# Press the okay button on the touchscreen
Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To
to exit.
reactivate your service, either call the number listed on
Clear Personal Data
the screen or visit the provider online.
NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button
on the touchscreen the following settings will be availand is available for U.S. residents only.
able:
Restore Settings
• Clear Personal Data
After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the When this feature is selected it will remove personal data
including Bluetooth® devices and presets. To remove
touchscreen the following settings will be available:
personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”
• Restore Settings
button and a pop-up will appear asking #Are you sure
When this feature is selected it will reset the Display, you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to
Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings. Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared,
To restore the settings to their default setting, press the a pop up appears stating #Personal data cleared”. Press
Restore Settings button. A pop-up will appear asking the back arrow button on the touchscreen to return to the
#Are you sure you want to reset your settings to default?” previous menu.
4
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Due to the extreme conditions encountered durAfter pressing the “System Information” button on the ing track use, any damage or wear associated with track
touchscreen the following information will be available: use is not covered by the manufacturer’s warranty.
If your SRT vehicle is equipped with Drive Modes, they
• System Information
will alter the vehicle’s performance in various driving
When System Information is selected, a System Informa- situations. It is recommended that your vehicle operates
tion screen will appear displaying the system software in SPORT or TRACK modes during the track event.
version.
Prior to each track event/day:
Guidelines For Race Track Use Of Your SRT
• Verify all fluids are at the correct levels. Refer to
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid levels & specifiWARNING!
cations.
Always drive carefully within your capabilities.
• Verify the front and rear brake pads have more than ½
Never drive in a reckless or dangerous manner,
the original pad thickness remaining. If the brake pads
which can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
require changing, please burnish prior to track outing
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
at full pace. Refer to “Track Burnishing Your Brakes.”
prevent accidents.
System Information
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
At the conclusion of each track event, it is recommended
that a brake bleed procedure be performed to maintain
the pedal feel and stopping capability of your Brembo
High Performance brake system.
Track usage results in increased operating temperatures
of the engine, transmission, clutch, driveline and brake
system. This increased operating temperature may affect
Noise Vibration Harshness (NVH) countermeasures deIt is recommended that each track outing end with a signed into your vehicle. New components may need to
minimum of one cool down lap using minimal braking. be installed to return the system to the original NVH
performance.
Change the differential and manual transmission fluid
after every five hours of track use. Refer to “Maintaining Recommended tire pressure for track use:
• Challenger/Charger: 40 psi hot, 32 psi front, 30 psi rear
Your Vehicle” for fluid levels & specifications.
cold
If equipped with a removable lower front fascia grille, it
is recommended to remove it for track use during Track Burnishing Your Brakes
warm/hot weather to improve cooling airflow to critical To avoid “green lining fade” during track use, the brake
powertrain and cooling system components.
pads and rotors must have a thermal burnish for factory
All SRT vehicles are track tested for 24 hours of endur- installed components or when new brake friction comance, however, it is recommended that the suspension ponents are installed:
system, brake system, prop shaft, and half shaft boots 1. Utilize one track session to burnish brakes by driving
should be inspected for wear or damage after every track
at 75% speed. Brake at approximately 0.60 – 0.80g Max
event.
without ABS intervention.
4
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
2. Lap the track in this manner until you start smelling 6. Sometimes, a second burnish session is required. If the
the brakes. Continue for another ½ lap at speed, then
brake pads start smelling in the next track session,
do a two lap cool down with minimal brake applicareduce speed and braking deceleration to burnish
tion. Make sure the brakes are not smoking. If they are,
targets and follow steps 2 through 4.
do another cool down lap.
7. New brake pads installed on old rotors still need to be
3. Do not continue for more than one full burnishing lap
burnished. New rotors installed with old pads should
after you start smelling the brakes. Do not get them
be burnished at the track, or street driven for 300 city
smoking heavily. This will get them too hot and will
miles, to develop an adequate lining transfer layer on
negatively affect their life in future track use.
the rotor surface prior to track use.
4. Allow the vehicle to sit and cool in the paddock for at 8. Rotors that pulsate during track use should be releast 30 minutes. If an infrared thermal gun is availplaced. Resurfacing of the rotors is not recommended,
able, allow the rotors to cool to 200° F (93.3° C) before
as it removes mass from the rotor, reducing its thermal
going back out.
capacity. Resurfacing also thins the rotor cheek, making it less robust and increasing the likelihood of
5. There should be a thin, ashy layer when inspecting the
pulsation in further track use.
pads installed in the caliper. If the ash layer is more
than ½ the thickness of the brake pad material, this is
an indication of too aggressive of a burnish.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
SRT Performance Pages
Performance Pages is an application that provides a
display for performance indicators, as received from the
Instrument Cluster, that will help you gain familiarity
with the capabilities of your SRT vehicle in real-time.
WARNING! (Continued)
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the Performance Pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
To access the SRT Performance Pages, press the “SRT &
Apps” button on the touchscreen, then press the “SRT
Performance” button on the touchscreen, or press “SRT
Pages” in the top left of the touchscreen while in Drive
Modes. Press the desired button on the touchscreen to
The Performance Pages include the following:
access that specific Performance Page.
• Home
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the SRT Performance Pages is intended for off-highway or offroad use only and should not be done on any public
(Continued)
• Timers
• Digital Gauge 1
• Digital Gauge 2
• G-Force
• Engine
4
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The following describes each feature and its operation:
Home
When Home is selected, the following features will be
available:
• A series of six images which can be selected by the
user.
• A left and right arrow to allow the user to scroll
through vehicle images.
• A short-cut to the SRT Drive Modes feature.
SRT Performance Pages — Home
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
When the Timers Page is selected you will be able to
select from following “Tickets”:
Timers
• Current
Pressing the “Current” button displays a “real time”
summary of the performance timers.
• Last
Pressing the “Last” button displays the last recorded run
of performance timers.
• Best
Pressing the “Best” button displays the best recorded run
of performance timers, except for braking data.
SRT Performance Pages — Timers
4
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• With a USB jump drive installed, press the “USB”
button to save runs to the jump drive.
• Save
Pressing the “Save” button will let you save the last run.
Any saved run over 10, will overwrite the last saved run • With an SD Card installed, press the “SD Card” to save
for Uconnect® System storage. The operation of the Save
runs to the SD Card.
feature is listed below:
• Press the “Uconnect” button to save the runs to the
Owner web page.
• Press the “Cancel” button to view the last timer
“Ticket.”
The “Tickets” contain the timers listed below:
• Reaction Time
Measures the driver’s reaction time for launching the
vehicle against a simulated drag strip timing light (behavior modeled after 500 Sportsman Tree) displayed in
the Driver Information Display (DID).
SRT Performance Pages — “Save”
NOTE: The Reaction Time, MPH, ⅛, and ¼ Mile timers
will be “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 MPH (0 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
• 0-60 MPH (0-100 km/h)
• Brake Distance
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to Displays the distance it takes the vehicle to make a full
60 mph (0 to 100 km/h).
stop. Contains current and last data for distance and start
– from speed.
• 0-100 MPH (0-160 km/h)
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go from 0 to NOTE: The distance measurement will be aborted if the
brake pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a
100 mph (0 to 160 km/h).
complete stop.
• ⅛ Mile (200 meter)
• Brake Speed
Displays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ⅛ Mile
Displays the speed the vehicle is traveling when the
(200 meters).
brake pedal is depressed.
• ¼ mile (400 meter)
NOTE: Brake Distance and Speed timers will only disDisplays the time it takes for the vehicle to go an ¼ mile play #ready# when vehicle is traveling at greater than 30
(400 meters).
MPH (48 km/h).
4
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Gauges 1
SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 1 (6.2L Automatic
Transmission)
SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 1 (6.2L Manual
Transmission)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Coolant Temperature
Shows the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
4
• Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
• Battery Voltage
Shows the actual battery voltage.
• Trans Oil Temp (Auto Transmission Only)
SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 1 (6.4L)
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
Shows the actual automatic transmission oil temperature. • Coolant Temperature
Shows the actual coolant temperature.
• Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
Gauges 2
SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 2 (6.4L Automatic
Transmission)
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Battery Voltage
SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 2 (6.4L Manual
Transmission)
Shows the actual battery voltage.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
• Intake Air Temperature
When selected, this screen displays the following values:
• Transmission Temperature (Automatic Transmission
Only)
Shows the current value for boost pressure.
Shows the actual transmission temperature.
Shows the current value for the air fuel ratio.
Shows the actual intake air temperature.
• Boost Pressure
• Air Fuel Ratio
• Inter-Cooler (I/C) Coolant Temperature
Shows the current value for the I/C coolant temperature.
• Intake Air Temperature
Shows the actual intake air temperature.
SRT Performance Pages — Gauges 2 (6.2L)
4
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When G-Force is selected, the following features will be
available:
G-Force
• Lateral G-Force Left and Right
The lateral g-force measures the (sideways) left and right
force of the vehicle.
• Longitudinal G-Force Fore and Aft
The longitudinal g-force measures the acceleration and
braking force of the vehicle.
• Peak G-Forces Fore Aft, Left and Right
SRT Performance Pages — G-Force
When selected, this screen displays all four G-Force
values (two lateral and two longitudinal) as well as
steering angle.
This shows the maximum g-forces that have been
achieved since the last reset from the DID. Peak values
are maintained through ignition cycles by the DID until
they are cleared by the driver.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
• Vehicle Speed
Engine
Vehicle Speed measures the current speed of the vehicle
in either mph or km/h, starting at 0 with no maximum
value.
• Steering Wheel Angle
4
Steering Wheel Angle utilizes the steering angle sensor to
measure the degree of the steering wheel relative to zero.
The zero degree measurement indicates a steering wheel
straight ahead position. When the steering angle value is
negative, this indicates a turn to the left, and when the
steering angle value is positive, a turn to the right.
When a force greater than zero is measured, the display
will update the value as it climbs. As the G-Force falls,
the peak forces will continue to display.
SRT Performance Pages — Engine (6.4L Automatic
Transmission)
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Instantaneous Horsepower/Kilowatts
Shows the instantaneous horsepower.
• Instantaneous Torque
Shows the instantaneous torque.
• Oil Pressure (6.4L Only)
Shows the actual oil pressure.
• Gear (Automatic Transmission Only)
SRT Performance Pages — Engine (6.2L Automatic
Transmission)
Shows the current (or pending) operating gear of the
vehicle.
• Boost Pressure (6.2L Only)
When selected, this screen displays the following values: Shows the actual boost pressure.
• Vehicle Speed
Shows the actual vehicle speed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
SRT Drive Modes
Key FOB 6.2L Supercharged Engine — If Equipped
RED key FOB unlocks the full potential of the engine’s
output, and allows the driver to select from two power
levels within Drive Modes Set-Up.
4
Red Key FOB
Black Key FOB
If your vehicle is equipped with the 6.2L supercharged
engine, it will support an additional engine power level Use of the BLACK key FOB limits the driver to a reduced
engine output. This information is also available within
configuration as part of SRT Drive Modes. Use of the
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the SRT Drive Modes interface, and can be accessed by vehicle systems depending upon the type of driving
pressing the “KEY FOB” button on the touchscreen in the behavior desired. The Drive Modes feature is controlled
SRT Drive Modes menu.
through the Uconnect® radio and may be accessed by
performing any of the following:
Drive Modes
• Pushing the SRT button on the instrument panel
switch bank.
• Selecting “Drive Modes” from the “SRT & Apps”
menu.
• Selecting “Drive Modes” from within the Performance
Pages menu.
NOTE: Not all options listed in this manual are available
on every vehicle. Refer to the chart below for all available
Drive Mode vehicle configurations.
Drive Modes
Your SRT vehicle is equipped with a Drive Modes feature
which allows for coordinating the operation of various
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
Engine/
Transmission
6.2L Auto
6.2L
Manual
6.4L Auto
6.4L
Manual
Red Key/
700+ HP
Black Key/
500 HP
Transmission
Paddle
Shifters
Suspension
Steering
Traction
X
X
X
X
X
N/A
X
N/A
X
X
N/A
N/A
X
X
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
X
N/A
X
N/A
X
X
X
X
X
X
4
The SRT Drive Modes main screen displays the current
drive mode and real-time status of the vehicle’s performance configuration. The selectable Drive Modes buttons
are Track, Sport, Custom, or Default and will be highlighted when displaying the current configuration. Information shown below each drive mode button will indicate the actual status of each system, along with a graphic
that displays the status of the vehicle’s components. The
color red indicates “Track,” orange “Sport,” and yellow
“Street.” If the system status shown does not match the
current drive mode set up, a message will be displayed
indicating which values are not matching the current
mode and why.
NOTE: ESC Full-Off can be activated across all of the
Drive Mode features by pushing and holding the ESC Off
button on the instrument panel switch bank for five
seconds.
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Listed below are the available Drive Modes:
Track Mode
Transmission, Traction, Steering, and Suspension systems
are all set to their “Track” settings highlighted in red. The
Paddle Shifters are enabled.
Sport Mode
Drive Modes (Track)
Pressing the “Track” button on the touchscreen will
activate the configuration for typical track driving. The
Drive Modes (Sport)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
Pressing the “Sport” button on the touchscreen will Default Mode
activate the configuration for typical enthusiast driving.
The Traction, Transmission, Steering, and Suspension
systems are all set to their “Sport” settings highlighted in
orange. The Paddle Shifters are enabled.
4
Drive Modes (Default)
The vehicle will start in Default Mode unless Valet mode
is active. This mode is for typical driving conditions
where the Traction and Transmission will be operating in
their Street settings, which cannot be changed while in
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
this mode. The Steering and Suspension can be configured in either the “Street,” “Sport,” or “Track” modes and
the Paddle Shifters may be enabled or disabled while in
this mode.
Custom Mode
Custom Mode
The Custom Mode may be selected quickly by pushing
the SRT button on the instrument panel switch bank two
times, or pressing the “Custom” button on the touchscreen. Custom Mode allows the you to create a custom
configuration that is saved for quick selection of your
favorite settings. While in Custom Mode, the Horsepower, Traction, Transmission, Steering, Suspension, and
Paddle Shifter settings are shown in their current configuration.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
Custom Mode Set-Up Info
Within the Custom Mode Set-Up screen, press the “info”
button on the touchscreen then use the left / right arrows
to scroll through all the available Drive Mode systems
giving you a description of their operation and current
configuration.
Custom Mode Set-Up — 6.4L Example
While in the Custom Drive Mode screen, press the
“Custom Set-Up” button on the touchscreen to access the
selectable options. In the Custom Mode Set-Up screen the
individual current configuration will be displayed. Select
which mode suits your driving needs for a custom
driving experience.
4
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Horsepower — If Equipped With 6.2L Supercharged
Engine
• 700+
Press the “700+” button on the touchscreen to modify the
output power of the engine to 700+ horsepower.
NOTE: This selection is only available with the RED
RKE Key Fob.
• 500
Press the “500” button on the touchscreen to modify the
output power of the engine to 500 horsepower.
NOTE: This selection is available with the RED or
BLACK RKE Key Fob.
Horsepower — 6.2L Supercharged Engine Only
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
Transmission — If Equipped With 8 Speed
Transmission
• Track
Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to provide
the fastest shift speeds and will have the highest comfort
trade-off.
• Sport
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to provide
faster shift speeds and will have a moderate comfort
trade-off.
• Street
Press the “Street” button on the touchscreen to provide a
balance of shift speed and comfort for typical daily
driving.
Transmission
4
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Paddle Shifters
• OFF
Press the “OFF” button on the touchscreen to disable
steering wheel paddle shifters.
Traction
Paddle Shifters
• ON
Press the “ON” button on the touchscreen to enable
steering wheel paddle shifters.
Traction
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
• Track
Suspension
Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to modify
traction control to optimize track performance with the
least stability control.
• Sport
4
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to turn off
traction control and reduce stability control.
• Street
Press the “Street” button on the touchscreen to provide
full traction control and full stability control.
Suspension
• Track
Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to provide
the firmest possible suspension stiffness with the highest
amount of comfort trade-off.
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Sport
Steering — If Equipped With 6.4L Engine
Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to provide a • Track
firmer suspension stiffness with moderate comfort trade- Press the “Track” button on the touchscreen to adjust the
off.
steering effort to the highest level.
• Street
• Sport
Press the “Street” button on the touchscreen to provide a Press the “Sport” button on the touchscreen to adjust the
balance of suspension stiffness and ride comfort for steering effort to the higher level.
typical daily driving.
• Street
Press the “Street# button on the touchscreen to adjust the
steering effort to the lowest level.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
Launch Control screen. Within Race Options, you can
activate, deactivate, and adjust the RPM values for the
Launch Control and Shift Light features.
Race Options
Launch Control
WARNING!
Race Options
Press the “Race Options” button on the touchscreen
while in the Drive Modes screen, to display the vehicle’s
Launch Mode is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be used on any public
roadways. It is recommended that this feature be
used in a controlled environment, and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
4
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Launch RPM Set-Up” to set the holding RPM. Launch
Mode can be turned on or off by either pushing the
Launch Control button on the instrument panel switch
bank (if activated), or by pressing the “Cancel Launch
Mode” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE: Launch RPM Set-Up cannot be accessed unless
Launch Mode is deactivated.
Activate Launch Control
Launch Control can be accessed by pushing the Launch
Control button on the instrument panel switch bank or
pressing the SRT button on the instrument panel switch
bank then selecting the“Race Options” button on the
touchscreen. Press the “Activate Launch Control” button
on the touchscreen to activate the feature. Press the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
For further information refer to “Drive Modes” in “Starting and Operating”.
Shift Light
4
Launch RPM Set-Up — Manual Transmission
To adjust the Launch RPM, drag the slider bar or press
the arrows on the touchscreen to adjust the holding RPM.
The launch RPM limits will vary between the automatic
transmissions (1500–3500 RPM) and manual transmissions (2000–4500 RPM).
Shift Light
To actuate the Shift Light feature, press the “Shift Light”
button on the touchscreen, then press the “Shift Light
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
On” button on the touchscreen. Activation is shown on
the Driver Information Display (DID). Pressing the “Shift
Light RPM Set-Up” button on the touchscreen will take
you to the Shift Light RPM Set-Up screen.
Shift Light RPM Set-Up
The Shift Light RPM Set-Up allows you to set the shift
light to actuate for gears 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5-8 (automatic
transmission) 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5–6 (manual transmission).
Pressing and releasing the up/down arrow buttons on
the touchscreen above and below each listed gear, the
RPM values will change in increments of 250 RPM.
Pressing and holding the arrows will change the RPM
values in increments of 500 RPM, ranging from 2000–
6000 RPM. The Shift Light setup screen may only be
accessed if the feature is enabled, press the “Reset to
factory default” button on the touchscreen to change
back to factory settings, or press the “Shift Light Off”
button on the touchscreen to turn the system off completely.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
not set, so you are free to select any 4 digit numeric
combination that will be easy to remember.
Valet Mode
While in Valet Mode the following vehicle configurations
are set and locked to prevent unauthorized modification:
• Engine limited to the lowest power output state.
• Transmission locks out access to first gear and upshifts earlier than normal.
• Traction, Steering, and Suspension are set to their
STREET settings.
• Steering wheel paddle shifters are disabled.
• The Drive Mode interface is not available. Pressing the
SRT button on the touchscreen will display the unlock
keypad.
To enter Valet Mode press the “Valet” button on the
touchscreen and a popup screen will ask you if you • The ESC Off button is disabled.
would like to enter Valet Mode, after selecting “Yes” you
will be asked to enter a 4 digit PIN code. The PIN code is • The Launch Control button is disabled.
Valet Mode Activation
4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Valet Mode Deactivation
Valet Mode Deactivation PIN
To exit Valet Mode you must enter the same 4 digit PIN
that was used to enter the mode. The unlock keypad can
be accessed by either pushing the SRT button on the
faceplate, or pressing the “Valet Mode Active – Press
Here to Exit” button on the touchscreen.
The Valet Mode Deactivation key pad will then prompt
you for your 4 digit PIN code, enter your PIN code and
press the “OK” button on the touchscreen. Your vehicle
will return to the default state after a key cycle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
NOTE: If your 4 digit PIN is lost or forgotten, the vehicle ECO Mode — If Equipped With Automatic
will exit Valet Mode after a battery disconnect for ap- Transmission
proximately one minute. Reconnect the battery and cycle
the ignition to the RUN position, the vehicle will be in
Default Mode.
4
Eco Mode
Press the “Eco” button on the touchscreen on the SRT
Drive Modes main menu. Eco mode modifies the vehicle’s engine and transmission settings to provide improved fuel economy at a trade-off with acceleration
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
performance. Increased engine exhaust noise and/or Located in the front storage area of the center console,
vibration may be noticed while Eco is active. This is this feature allows an iPod®/MP3 player, or an external
normal and a result of the increased amount of operating USB device, to be connected to the audio system.
conditions where the vehicle is allowed to operate in four
cylinder shutoff mode (6.4L Only).
The Paddle Shifters will be disabled while in Eco mode.
• Changing the Drive Mode will deactivate Eco.
• Eco will be disabled when another Drive Mode is
selected or “Eco” button is pressed.
Uconnect® RADIOS — IF EQUIPPED
For detailed information about your Uconnect® radio,
refer to your Uconnect® Supplement Manual.
USB/AUX/SD Card Ports
iPod®/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
1 — Aux Jack
This feature allows an iPod® or external USB device to be 2 — USB Port
plugged into the USB port.
3 — SD Card
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
iPod® control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod®
and iPhone® devices. Some iPod® software versions
may not fully support the iPod® control features. Please
visit Apple’s website for software updates.
For further information, refer to the Uconnect® User’s
Manual.
4
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Remote Sound Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
push-button in the center and controls the volume and
mode of the sound system. Pushing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Pushing the center button will make the radio switch Media Mode
between the various modes available (AM/FM/AUX Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next
etc.).
track on the selected media (AUX, Bluetooth®, SD Card).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a Pushing the bottom of the switch once will go to the
push-button in the center. The function of the left-hand beginning of the current track, or to the beginning of the
control is different depending on which mode you are in. previous track if it is within eight seconds after the
current track begins to play.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the
each mode.
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
The button located in the center of the left-hand control your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro- by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
grammed in the radio preset button.
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emitturned down or off during mobile phone operation when ted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However,
the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
not using Uconnect® (if equipped).
situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If
Regulatory And Safety Information
you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask
USA/CANADA
for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).
is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
Nevertheless, the wireless radio shall be used in such a 1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human
2. This device must accept any interference received,
body.
including interference that may cause undesired opThe internal wireless radio operates within guidelines
eration.
found in radio frequency safety standards and recommendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie
Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licommunity.
cence. L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions
The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless suivantes: (1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouilradio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy lage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout
4
310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est • Increase the separation between the equipment and
susceptible d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
receiver.
NOTE:
• This equipment has been tested and found to comply
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to
provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician
for help.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather. This
system can be operated through either the controls on the
instrument panel or through the Uconnect® system display.
When the Uconnect® system is in different modes (Radio, Player, Settings, More, etc.) the driver and passenger
• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to temperature settings will be indicated at the top of the
radio or television reception, which can be determined display.
by turning the equipment off and on, the user is
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311
General Overview
Buttons On The Touchscreen
Buttons On The Faceplate
Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the
Uconnect® system screen.
The buttons on the faceplate are located below the
Uconnect® screen.
4
Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On The
Faceplate
Uconnect® 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls —
Buttons On The Touchscreen
312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The 4. AUTO Operation Button
Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by
1. MAX A/C Button
adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing
Press and release to change the current setting, the this function will cause the system to switch between
indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic
this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to Operation” for more information.
switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator 5. Front Defrost Button
will turn off.
Press and release to change the current airflow setting to
2. A/C Button
Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feaPress and release to change the current setting, the ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side
indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this window demist outlets. When the defrost button is
function again will cause the A/C operation to switch selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode
into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off. with maximum temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing
3. Recirculation Button
this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual
Press and release to change the current setting, the mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate
system will return the previous setting.
indicator illuminates when ON.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313
6. Rear Defrost Button
Press and release this button to turn on the rear window
defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped).
An indicator will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after 10 minutes.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
7. Passenger Temperature
(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
Control
Up
Button
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar button towards the red arrow
for warmer temperature settings.
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
automatically exit Sync.
4
314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
8. Passenger Temperature Control
(Uconnect® 8.4 Radio Only)
Down
Button 10. Blower Control
Provides the passenger with independent temperature
control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler
temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and
slide the temperature bar button towards the blue arrow
for cooler temperature settings.
Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air
forced through the climate system. There are seven
blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause
automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The
speeds can be selected using either the blower control
knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen
as follows:
NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will
Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate
automatically exit Sync.
The blower speed increases as you turn the blower
control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower
Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated control knob counterclockwise.
when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize
the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature
setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.
9. SYNC
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315
Button On The Touchscreen
• Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting
floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed
and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
through
the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar
area between the icons.
NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con11. Modes
The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air
comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets
and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
• Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument
panel. Each of these outlets can be individually
adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of the
center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
down or side to side to regulate airflow direction. There
is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off
or adjust the amount of airflow from these outlets.
ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and
warmer air from the floor outlets.
• Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount
of air is directed through the defrost and side
window demister outlets.
• Mix Mode
Air comes from the floor, defrost and side window
demist outlets. This mode works best in cold or
snowy conditions.
4
316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
12. Climate Control OFF Button
14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button (Uconnect®
8.4 Only)
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
Provides the driver with independent temperature con13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button trol. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide
(Uconnect® 8.4 Only)
the temperature bar button towards the red arrow for
Provides the driver with independent temperature con- warmer temperature settings.
trol. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperaNOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the
temperature bar button towards the blue arrow for cooler adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same
time.
temperature settings.
Climate Control Functions
NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically
adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same A/C (Air Conditioning)
time.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator
to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning
system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317
button to turn off the air conditioning and manually MAX A/C
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perforsure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.
mance.
NOTE:
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the
• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix, prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates
Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but when MAX A/C is ON.
the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be
of the windows.
adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass, will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior
select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.
needed.
Recirculation
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (loWhen outside air contains smoke, odors, or
cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric
pressing the Recirculation control button. The
front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
recirculation indicator will illuminate when this button is
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
4
318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
selected. Press the button a second time to turn off the 2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like the
system to maintain by adjusting the driver and pasRecirculation mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
senger temperature buttons on the faceplate or butNOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
tons on the touchscreen. Once the desired temperature
lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation
is displayed, the system will achieve and automatifeature may be unavailable (button on touchscreen
cally maintain that comfort level.
greyed out). The Recirculation mode is not allowed in
Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation. 3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is
not necessary to change the temperature. You will
Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode
experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing
is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
the system to function automatically.
mode will cause the LED in the control button to blink
and then turn off.
NOTE:
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.
The system automatically adjusts the temperature,
Automatic Operation
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate or press the
as possible.
“AUTO” button on the touchscreen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric
units by selecting the Uconnect® customerprogrammable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect® System Settings” in this section of the manual.
The operator can also select the direction of the airflow
by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C
operation and Recirculation control can also be manually
selected in Manual operation.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic
mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain
on low until the engine warms up. The blower will
increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.
NOTE: Each of these features operates independently
from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,
temperature control will continue to operate automatically.
Manual Operation Override
Operating Tips
The system allows for manual selection of blower speed, NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con- suggested control settings for various weather conditrol.
tions.
The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by
adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at
a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This
allows the front occupants to control the volume of air
circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected with a
high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating.
A solution of 50% OAT (Organic Additive Technology)
4
320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
coolant that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS.90032 and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side winWinter Operation
dow fogging becomes objectionable, increase blower
Use of the air Recirculation mode during winter months
speed to improve airflow and clearing of the side winis not recommended because it may cause window
dows. Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
fogging.
but rainy or humid weather.
Vacation Storage
NOTE:
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air • Recirculate without A/C should not be used for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will ensure • Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will automatiadequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility
cally adjust the climate control settings to reduce or
of compressor damage when the system is started again.
eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.
When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321
Outside Air Intake
A/C Air Filter
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for filter replacement instructions.
4
322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323
Uconnect® VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect®
Start using Uconnect® Voice Recognition with these
helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands
and tips you need to know to control your Uconnect® 5.0
or 8.4A/8.4AN system.
4
Uconnect® 8.4AN
If you see the
icon on your touchscreen, you have
the Uconnect® 8.4AN system. If not, you have a
Uconnect® 8.4A system.
324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect® system with
your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and
feature compatibility and to find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of noise that may impact
recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while
facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned
on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first
push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts
by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice
Command from current category.
Uconnect® Voice Command
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For all radios: Push To Begin Radio or Media functions. For
8.4A/8.4AN only: Push to begin Navigation, Apps And Climate
Functions
3 — Push To End Call
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any
point while using your Uconnect® system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• Cancel to stop a current voice session
4
• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands
• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice
recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN
326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM
Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscription or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM
• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR button
and say “Help.” The system will provide you
with a list of commands.
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all
of the music on your iPod® or USB device. Your Voice
Uconnect® offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth®
Command must match exactly how the artist, album,
and auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only
song and genre information is displayed.
available for connected USB and iPod® devices. (Remote
CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Media
. After the beep, say one of the
Push the VR button
following commands and follow the prompts to
switch your media source or choose an artist.
4
• Change source to Bluetooth®
• Change source to iPod®
• Change source to USB
• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play
song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Media
328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy
with Uconnect®. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and
pairing instructions.
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the
Phone button
and say “Call,” then pronounce the
name exactly as it appears in your phone book. When
a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say
“Call John Smith work.”
. After the beep, say one of
Push the Phone button
the following commands:
• Call John Smith
• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts
• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)
• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Phone
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect® will announce incoming text messages. Push
and say Listen. (Must have comthe Phone button
patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect® system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
the Phone button
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
I’ll call you
I need
See you in
later.
directions.
<number> of
minutes.
I’m on my way. Can’t talk right
now.
I’m lost.
Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa2. Listen to the Uconnect® prompts. After the beep, tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advanrepeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit
system prompts.
UconnectPhone.com. Apple iPhone® iOS6 or later supports reading incoming text messages only.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)
Yes.
Stuck in Traffic.
See you later.
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures handsStart without
No.
I’ll be Late.
free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep
me.
moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate
Okay.
Where are you? I will be <numcontrol.)
ber> minutes
Are you there
Call me.
late.
yet?
4
330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the VR button
following commands:
. After the beep, say one of the
• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees
• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice
Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or
steering wheel (If equipped).
Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate
Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)
The Uconnect® navigation feature helps you save time
and become more productive when you know exactly
how to get to where you want to go. (Navigation is
optional on the Uconnect® 8.4A system. See your dealer
to activate navigation at any time.)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331
1. To enter a destination, press the VR button
the beep, say:
. After
• For the 8.4A Uconnect® System, say: “Enter state.”
• For the 8.4AN Uconnect® System, say: “Navigate to
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”
4
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP: To start a POI search, press the VR button
After the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”
.
Uconnect® 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation
Uconnect® Access* (8.4A/8.4AN)
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take
advantage of the Uconnect® Access services in the next
section of this guide. To register with Uconnect® Access,
332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get
started. Detailed registration instructions can be found
on the next page.
Roadside Assistance Call
Wi-Fi Hotspot***
**If vehicle is equipped.
*Uconnect® Access is available only on equipped vehicles purchased within the continental United States and ***Extra charges apply.
Alaska. Services can only be used where coverage is Register (8.4A/8.4AN)
available; see coverage map for details.
1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the 8.4-inch
9-1-1 Call
touchscreen.
Theft Alarm Notification
2. If a pop-up message appears, press Register or go to
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
the Favorite Apps menu and press Uconnect® Registration.
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn and Lights
Yelp® Search
Voice Texting
3. Read through the registration instructions. Enter and
confirm your personal email address. Then press
Send.
4. Check your personal inbox for an email from
Uconnect® Access.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333
5. Click on the link inside the email within 72 hours and
complete the easy online registration process to create
a personal Mopar® Owner Connect account linked to
your vehicle.
Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)
Securely link your mobile device to your vehicle with the
Uconnect® Access App. Once you have downloaded the
App, you may start your vehicle or lock it from virtually
any distance. (Vehicle must be properly equipped with
factory-installed Remote Start.)
Uconnect® Registration 8.4A/8.4AN
Mobile App
4
334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Download the Uconnect® Access App to a compatible 2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the
Apple® or Android® mobile devices. All you need to do
message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect®
is:
to process your message.
1. After registering with Uconnect® Access, log on to 3. The Uconnect® system will repeat your message and
your Mopar® Owner Connect account at
provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or
moparownerconnect.com.
hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect®
what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy
2. On the Dashboard page, enter your mobile phone
with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”
number to receive a link to download the App on your
mobile device. Or go to iTunes®, or Google Play, and You must be registered with Uconnect® Access and have
a compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your
search for the Uconnect® Access App.
voice to send a personalized text message.
3. To activate the App, enter your Mopar Owner Connect
user name and password and log in. Your vehicle is TIP:
then connected to your mobile device.
• Not compatible with iPhone®.
Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)
• Messages are limited to 140 characters.
1. To send a message, push the Phone button
. After
• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be
the beep, say the following command: “Send mesilluminated to use the feature.
sage to John Smith.”
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335
Yelp® (8.4A/8.4AN)
Once registered with Uconnect® Access, you can use
your voice to search for the most popular places or things
around you.
1. Press the VR button
“Launch YELP.”
. After the beep, say:
2. Once the YELP® home screen appears on the touchscreen, press the VR button
, then say: “YELP
search.”
3. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell
Yelp®
Uconnect® the place or business that you’d like
Uconnect® to find.
SiriusXM Travel Link™ (8.4A/8.4AN)
TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,
results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?
SiriusXM Travel Link™ is a suite of services that brings a
Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.
wealth of information right to your Uconnect® 8.4AN
system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)
4
336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the VR button
following commands:
. After the beep, say one of the
• Show fuel prices
• Show 5 - day weather forecast
• Show extended weather
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Command.
SiriusXM Travel Link™
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337
Additional Information
Mon. – Fri., 7:00 am – 12:00 am, ET
© 2014 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner
Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a
trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,
Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered
trademarks of Yelp.
Sat., 8:00 am – 10:00 pm, ET
Uconnect® System Support:
• U.S. residents call
DriveUconnect.com
1-877-855-8400
or
visit
• Canadian residents call 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French) or visit DriveUconnect.ca
Sun., 9:00 am – 5:00 pm, ET
Uconnect® Access Services Support 1-855-792-4241.
Please have your Uconnect® Security PIN ready when
you call.
4
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
! STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343 ! MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . .351
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . . .343
▫ Six-Speed Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . .351
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .344
▫ Shifting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
▫ 1–4 Skip Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –20°F Or −29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
! ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .350
! AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .355
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .357
5
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
! POWER STEERING — 6.2L SUPERCHARGED
ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
! AUTOSTICK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365 ! FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF EQUIPPED. . .385
!
!
!
!
! PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters Or
Console Mounted Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . .
DRIVE MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . .
▫ Launch Mode — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
! BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Guidelines For Track Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
! ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .379
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . .
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . .
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . .
DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .381
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . .
POWER STEERING — 6.4L ENGINE . . . . . . . . .383
. . . .385
. . . .386
. . . .386
. . . .388
. . . .389
. . . .389
. . . .392
. . . .392
. . . .393
. . . .394
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
▫ Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
▫ Synchronizing ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
▫ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
! TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .406
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .407 ! TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .421
! TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .412 ! TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .421
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
▫ All Season Tires — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .416
▫ Tire Rotation — Same tire size on front and
rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
▫ Tire Rotation — Different tire size on front and
rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
! TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .423
5
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .436
! FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 ! VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ 6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engine . . . . . . . .430
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . .437
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . .437
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .431
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432 ! TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433 ! RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .439
! ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
WARNING!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving children in
a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or
fatally injured. Children should be warned not to
touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition (of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™) in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the shift lever in NEUTRAL and press the clutch pedal before starting vehicle.
This vehicle is equipped with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will not start unless the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor.
Normal Starting With Integrated Key — Manual
Transmission
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
5
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
Press the clutch pedal fully to the floor, and cycle the
ignition switch to the START position and release when
the engine starts. If the engine fails to start within 15
seconds, place the ignition in the OFF position, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has started, ignite and
damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has
a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from another vehicle. This type of start
can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow the
procedure carefully. Refer to “Jump Starting” in
“What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
Using Fob With Integrated Key (Tip Start)
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push
of a button, as long as the ENGINE
START/STOP button is installed and
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter-NGo™ Key Fob is in the passenger
compartment.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly place the ignition in the START position
and release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter
motor will continue to run, and it will disengage automatically when the engine is running. If the engine fails
to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10 Normal Starting
seconds. If this occurs, place the ignition in the LOCK/
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button —
OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
Automatic Transmission Only
“Normal Starting” procedure.
1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pressing the
ENGINE START/STOP button once.
5
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. The system takes over and attempts to start the 3. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to
the engine starting, release the button.
vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will
disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the
accelerator pedal.
the engine starting, press the button again.
NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the START/STOP Button — Automatic Transmission
Only
accelerator pedal.
Using The ENGINE START/STOP Button —
Manual Transmission Only
1. Place the shift lever in PARK, then press and release
the ENGINE START/STOP button.
1. Press and hold the clutch pedal while pressing and 2.
holding the ENGINE START/STOP button.
3.
2. Release the button when the engine starts. If the
vehicle fails to start within 15 seconds, release the
button, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
If the shift lever is not in PARK, the ENGINE START/
STOP button must be held for two seconds and vehicle
speed must be above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the
engine will shut off. The ignition switch position will
remain in the ACC position until the shift lever is in
PARK and the button is pressed twice to the OFF
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
position. If the shift lever is not in PARK and the 2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.
ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed once, the
3. Place the shift lever in first gear or REVERSE and then
Driver Information Display (DID) will display a “VEapply the parking brake.
HICLE NOT IN PARK” message and the engine will
remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of the NOTE:
PARK position, or it could roll.
• If the ignition switch is left in the ACC position, the
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN
inactivity and the ignition will switch to the OFF
(engine not running) position and the transmission is in
position.
PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30
minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the
• If the ignition switch is left in the RUN position, the
OFF position.
system will automatically time out after 30 minutes of
inactivity if the vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h) and
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE
the engine is not running.
START/STOP Button — Manual Transmission
Only
• If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h), the
1. With the vehicle stopped, place the shift lever in
ENGINE START/STOP button must be held for two
NEUTRAL, then press and release the ENGINE
seconds before the engine will shut off. The ignition
START/STOP button.
5
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
switch position will remain in the ACC position until 3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time
to return the ignition switch to the OFF position.
the vehicle is stopped and the button is pressed twice
to the OFF position.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ Functions — With Driver’s
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
Foot OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK
an externally powered electric engine block heater (availOr NEUTRAL Position)
able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
The Keyless Enter-N-Go™ feature operates similar to an
If Engine Fails To Start
ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC and
RUN. To change the ignition switch positions without
WARNING!
starting the vehicle and use the accessories follow these
steps starting with the ignition switch in the OFF posi- • Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
tion:
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
1. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button once to
causing serious personal injury.
change the ignition switch to the ACC position,
2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time
to change the ignition switch to the RUN position,
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster
cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster
battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type
of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer
to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button) — Automatic Transmission
Only
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather# procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
and hold the brake pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
the way to the floor and hold it, then press and release the
ENGINE START/STOP button once. The starter motor
will engage automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then
disengage. Once this occurs, release the accelerator pedal
and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat
the “Normal Starting” procedure.
5
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
Clearing A Flooded Engine (Using ENGINE
START/STOP Button) — Manual Transmission
Only
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather# proce- grounded, three-wire extension cord.
dures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, press
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one
and hold the clutch pedal, push the accelerator pedal all
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.
the way to the floor and hold it, then press and hold the
ENGINE START/STOP button for no more than 15 The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
seconds. Release the accelerator pedal and the clutch the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
pedal, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal is located near the air box.
Starting” procedure.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
Six-Speed Manual Transmission
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
CAUTION!
• Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch
pedal, or try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the
clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause
abnormal wear on the clutch. Refer to “Electronic
Brake Control System/Hill Start Assist” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
• Failure to press the clutch pedal fully to the floor
may cause increased shift efforts, and may result in
damage to the clutch and transmission.
• Do not rest your hand on the shift lever while
driving, as this may result in transmission synchronizer damage.
• Do not attempt to shift the transmission if the rear
wheels are spinning due to loss of traction. Damage to the transmission may occur.
5
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: During cold weather, you may experience in- NOTE:
creased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid
• Your vehicle is equipped with a transmission reverse
warms up. This is normal.
inhibitor system. When vehicle speed is greater than
3 mph (5 km/h), the reverse inhibitor activates to help
prevent shifts into REVERSE. When at a complete stop,
you may notice lighter shift efforts into REVERSE with
the ignition switch in the ON position (RUN position
for Keyless Enter-N-Go) as compared to the LOCK
position (OFF position for Keyless Enter-N-Go). This is
normal operation of the transmission reverse inhibitor
system.
Manual Shifter
• Due to the high performance nature of your drivetrain,
you may hear your transmission. This can be most
noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL
with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it
may also be heard when driving at low engine RPM.
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
Also, this may be more noticeable when the transmis- second or fifth gear. If you let the shift lever move in the
sion is warm. This is a normal condition and is not an direction of the pulling, you may end shifting from first
indication of a problem with your clutch or transmis- to fourth or from sixth to third gear.
sion.
Shifting
CAUTION!
Fully press the clutch pedal and lift your foot off the Always make sure the vehicle comes to a complete
accelerator pedal before shifting gears. As you release the stop before shifting into REVERSE. Failure to do so
clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator pedal. Damage may result in transmission damage.
to the transmission or clutch may occur if you do not
You must always use first gear (or REVERSE) when
fully press the clutch pedal and lift off of the accelerator
starting from a standing position.
pedal when shifting.
Recommended Shift Speeds
The six-speed manual transmission has a spring that
centers the shift lever near third and fourth gear. This To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel
spring helps you know which gear you are in when you economy, it should be upshifted as listed in recomare shifting. Be careful when shifting from first to second mended shift speed chart.
or downshifting from sixth to fifth.
The spring will try to pull the shift lever toward third and
fourth gear. Make sure you move the shift lever into
5
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
Engine
6.2L Supercharged
6.4L
MANUAL TRANSMISSION RECOMMENDED SHIFT SPEEDS
1-4
4-5
mph
20
25
(km/h)
(32)
(40)
mph
20
37
(km/h)
(32)
(59)
5-6
42
(67)
48
(77)
Earlier upshifts during cruise conditions (relatively (41°C), vehicle speed is greater than 19 mph (30 km/h)
but less than 21 mph (34 km/h), and the transmission is
steady speeds) may result in increased fuel economy.
in first gear, and the accelerator is at ¼ throttle or less.
Higher upshift speeds may be used to obtain a desired
After you shift the transmission to fourth gear, you can
acceleration rate.
press the clutch in and shift to another forward gear.
1–4 Skip Shift
There are times when you must shift the transmission Downshifting
directly from first gear to fourth gear instead of from first To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, downgear to second gear. This is to help you get the best shift to maintain a safe speed when descending a steep
possible fuel economy from your vehicle. This occurs grade.
when the engine coolant (antifreeze) is higher than 106°F
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
WARNING!
Skipping more than one gear while downshifting,
could cause you to lose control of your vehicle. You
could have a collision.
CAUTION!
• If you skip more than one gear while downshifting
or downshift at too high an engine speed, you
could damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
• Do not downshift into first gear when the vehicle is
moving faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), as you could
damage the engine and/or clutch.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
5
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the Key Fob.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the transmission gear selector.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after
the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the
transmission in PARK whenever the ignition switch is in
the OFF position.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the engine must be running and the brake
pedal must be pressed.
The brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
stopped or moving at low speeds.
shifting out of PARK.
Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If
Key Ignition Park Interlock
Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park InterThe transmission gear range (PRNDM) is displayed both
lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK
on the shift lever and in the Driver Information Display
before the engine can be turned off. This helps the driver
(DID).
avoid inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
5
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
To select a gear range, press the lock button on the shift
lever and move the lever rearward or forward. You must
also press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out of
PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in this section). Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
Automatic Transmission Shifter
The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal
condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few
hundred miles (kilometers).
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
shifting between these gears.
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and MANUAL (Autostick) shift positions.
Manual shifts can be made using the Autostick shift
control (refer to “AutoStick” in this section for further
information). Toggling the shift lever forward (-) or
rearward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position
(beside the DRIVE position) will manually select the
transmission gear, and will display the current gear in the
instrument cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc.
NOTE: If the shift lever cannot be moved to the PARK,
REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when pushed forward) it is probably in the MANUAL (AutoStick, +/-)
position (beside the DRIVE position). In MANUAL
(AutoStick) mode, the transmission gear is displayed in
the instrument cluster (as M1, M2, M3, etc.). Move the
shift lever to the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for
access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
5
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift the
transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking
brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the
shift lever out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK
before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
turn the engine OFF, and remove the key fob. When
the ignition is in the OFF position, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle
against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the
ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must start the engine and also press the brake
pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift lever could
result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
The following indicators should be used to ensure that periods with the engine running. Apply the parking
you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi- brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must
leave the vehicle.
tion:
• When shifting into PARK, press the lock button on the
shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way
forward until it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and
verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
WARNING! (Continued)
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The
DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain or traveling into strong head winds),
use the AutoStick shift control (refer to #AutoStick# in this
section for further information) to select a lower gear.
Under these conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or
below), transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and transmission temperature as well as
DRIVE (D)
vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the
This range should be used for most city and highway transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission
5
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will
position) enables full manual control of transmission inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and
indicate what actions may be necessary.
shifting (also known as AutoStick mode; refer to
“AutoStick” in this section for further information). Tog- In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission
gling the shift lever forward (-) or rearward (+) while in can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the
the MANUAL (AutoStick) position will manually select following steps.
the transmission gear, and will display the current gear in
NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message
the instrument cluster as M1, M2, M3, etc.
indicates the transmission may not re-engage after enTransmission Limp Home Mode
gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired
Transmission function is monitored electronically for location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).
MANUAL (M)
abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could
result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home
Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.
Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the
engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission
may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,
shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.
3. Press and hold the ignition switch until the engine
turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
This system can also provide you with more control
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions,
longer detected, the transmission will return to normal mountain driving, and many other situations.
operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest
possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could recur.
5
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
AUTOSTICK
Steering Wheel Mounted Paddle Shifters Or
Console Mounted Shifter
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission feature
1 — (–) Shift Paddle
providing manual shift control, giving you more control
of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance.
2 — (+) Shift Paddle
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
Operation
When the shift lever is in the DRIVE (D) position, the
transmission will operate automatically, shifting between
the eight available gears. To activate AutoStick, move the
shift lever into the MANUAL (M) position (beside the
DRIVE position). The current transmission gear will be
displayed in the instrument cluster, along with a highlighted #M# (Manual) indication. When the shift lever is
in the MANUAL (M) position, tap the shift lever forward
(-) (or tap the (-) shift paddle on the steering wheel) to
downshift the transmission to the next lower gear, (or tap
the lever rearward (+) or tap the (+) shift paddle), to
command an upshift.
NOTE: Tapping one of the steering wheel-mounted shift
paddles (+/-), while the shift lever is in DRIVE, will
activate a temporary AutoStick mode. Tapping (-) to
enter AutoStick mode will downshift the transmission to
the next lower gear, while using (+) to enter AutoStick
mode will retain the current gear. The current gear will be
displayed in the instrument cluster, but the #M# will not
be highlighted. The transmission will revert back to
normal operation (if the shift lever remains in DRIVE)
after a period of time, depending on accelerator pedal
activity.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver
(using the shift lever, or the shift paddles), unless an
engine lugging or overspeed condition would result. It
will remain in the selected gear until another upshift or
downshift is chosen, except as described below.
• In temporary AutoStick mode (shift lever in DRIVE),
the transmission will automatically shift up when
maximum engine speed is reached. Lack of accelerator
pedal activity will cause the transmission to revert to
automatic operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
• If normal AutoStick mode is engaged (shift lever in • If a requested downshift would cause the engine to
MANUAL position), manual gear selection will be
over-speed, that shift will not occur.
maintained until the shift lever is returned to DRIVE,
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too low
or as described below. The transmission will not
of a vehicle speed.
upshift automatically at redline in this mode, nor will
downshifts be obtained if the accelerator pedal is • Holding the (-) paddle depressed, or holding the shift
pressed to the floor.
lever in the (-) position, will downshift the transmission to the lowest gear possible at the current speed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the
vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) and will • Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
display the current gear.
AutoStick is engaged.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first • The system may revert to automatic shift mode if a
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver
fault or overheat condition is detected.
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the shift lever to the
vehicle is accelerated.
DRIVE position, or press and hold the (+) shift paddle (if
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or second gear. the shift lever is already in DRIVE) until “D” is once
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in second again indicated in the instrument cluster. You can shift in
gear. Starting out in second gear can be helpful in or out of the AutoStick mode at any time without taking
snowy or icy conditions.
your foot off the accelerator pedal.
5
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
DRIVE MODES
Your SRT vehicle is equipped with a SRT Drive Mode
feature. This feature gives the driver control over the
systems in the vehicle which affect its performance,
enabling the driver to tune it for desired driving scenarios. Below are the modes of operation:
Drive Modes
• TRACK Mode — TRACK Mode is a pre-defined
configuration optimized for typical track driving. The
NOTE: Refer to “Uconnect® Settings” in “Understanding
ABS, Transmission, Steering, and Suspension systems
Your Instrument Panel” for further descriptions of these
are all set to their TRACK settings. Steering wheel
modes.
mounted paddle shifters are enabled.
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
• SPORT Mode — SPORT Mode is a pre-defined configuration optimized for typical enthusiast driving.
The ABS, Transmission, Steering, and Suspension systems are all set to their SPORT settings. Steering wheel
mounted paddle shifters are enabled.
• CUSTOM — CUSTOM Mode allows the driver to
create a custom vehicle configuration that is saved for
quick selection of favorite settings. The system will
return to Default mode when the ignition switch is
cycled from RUN to OFF to RUN, if this mode is
selected. While in Custom Mode the Traction, Transmission, Steering, Suspension and Paddle shifter setCustom Mode Set-Up
tings may be configured through the custom mode
Listed below is a description of each of these settings:
set-up in any combination.
Transmission (Trans)
• Track — provides the fastest shift speeds and has the
highest comfort trade-off.
5
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Sport — provides a faster shift speed and has a Suspension (Susp)
moderate comfort trade-off.
• Track — provides the firmest possible suspension
• Street — provides a balance of shift speed and comfort
stiffness with the highest amount of comfort trade-off.
for typical daily driving.
• Sport — provides a firmer suspension stiffness with
Paddles — If Equipped
moderate comfort trade-off.
• On — enables steering wheel mounted paddle shifters. • Street — provides a balance of suspension stiffness
and ride comfort for typical daily driving.
• Off — disables steering wheel mounted paddle shifters.
Steering — 6.4L Engine Only
• Track — provides the greatest amount of steering
feedback, requiring the highest amount of steering
• Track — modifies traction control to optimize track
effort.
performance with the least stability control.
• Sport — provides greater steering feedback, requiring
• Sport — turns off traction control and reduces stability
greater steering effort.
control.
• Street — provides a balance of steering feedback and
• Street — provides full traction control and full stability
steering effort.
control.
Traction
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
Engine Power — 6.2L Supercharged Engine Only
• 700+ HP — Provides engine output power to 700+
horsepower
NOTE: This selection is only available with the RED RKE
Key Fob “700+ HP”.
(active dampening system) stiffness may be configured to either the STREET, SPORT or TRACK settings
within this mode. Steering wheel mounted paddle
shifters may be enabled or disabled while in this mode
as well.
NOTE: The vehicle will restart with DEFAULT active if
• 500 HP — Provides engine output power to 500 DEFAULT was active when the vehicle was last shut
horsepower
down.
NOTE: This selection is available with the RED or
BLACK RKE Key Fob “500 HP”.
• VALET — To enter Valet Mode the operator must
select it from the Drive Modes interface and enter a
four digit PIN code. The PIN code is not predeter• DEFAULT — DEFAULT Mode will be activated automined, so the operator is free to select any four digit
matically when restarting the vehicle unless Valet
numeric combination that will be easy to remember.
mode is active. This mode is for typical driving conWhile in Valet Mode the following vehicle configuraditions where the ABS and Transmission will be opertions are set and locked to prevent unauthorized
ating in their STREET settings, which cannot be
modification:
changed while in this mode. The Steering (electric
power steering — if equipped) assist and Suspension • Engine limited to a lowest power output state.
5
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Transmission locks out access to first gear and shifts • The vehicle will restart with VALET active if VALET
earlier than normal.
was active when the vehicle was last shut down.
• Traction, Steering and Suspension are forced to • Eco (Automatic Transmission only) — Eco modifies
STREET settings.
the vehicle’s engine and transmission settings to provide improved fuel economy at a trade-off with accel• Steering wheel mounted paddle shifters are disabled.
eration performance. Increased engine exhaust noise
• The SRT Drive Modes are not available. Pressing the
and/or vibration may be noticed while Eco is active,
SRT button will display the unlock keypad.
this is normal and will not damage the vehicle.
• The ESC Off button is disabled.
NOTE: Changing the Drive Mode will deactivate Eco.
• The Launch Control button is disabled.
NOTE:
Launch Mode — If Equipped
• To exit VALET Mode the operator must enter the same
four digit PIN that was used to enter the mode. The
unlock keypad can be accessed by either pressing the
SRT button or selecting to disable Valet on the
Uconnect® touchscreen.
This vehicle is equipped with a Launch Control system
that is designed to allow the driver to achieve maximum
vehicle acceleration in a straight line. Launch Control is a
form of traction control that manages tire slip while
launching the vehicle. This feature is intended for use
during race events on a closed course where consistent
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
quarter mile and zero to sixty times are desired. The • Launch Control is intended to be used on dry, paved
system is not intended to compensate for lack of driver
road surfaces only. Use on slippery or loose surfaces
experience or familiarity with the race track. Use of this
may cause damage to vehicle components and is not
feature in low traction (cold, wet, gravel, etc.) conditions
recommended.
may results in excess wheel slip outside this systems Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
control resulting in an aborted launch.
Launch Control is only available when the following
NOTE: Launch mode is not available within the first 500 procedure is followed:
miles of engine break-in.
1. Push the LAUNCH button on the center stack switch
Preconditions:
bank.
• Launch control should not be used on public roads. NOTE: Pushing the SRT button on the center stack or
Always check track conditions and the surrounding
pressing the “SRT & Apps” button on the touchscreen are
area.
two other options to access launch control features.
• Launch Control is not available for the first 500 miles Please refer to “Uconnect® Settings” within your Owner’s Manual on the DVD for further information.
of the vehicle’s life.
• Launch Control should only be used when the engine 2. Press the “Launch RPM Set-Up” button on the touchscreen. This screen will allow you to adjust your
and transmission are at operating temperature.
launch RPM’s for optimum launch/traction.
5
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Press the “Activate Launch Mode” button on the 9. Keep the vehicle pointed straight.
touchscreen.
Launch control will be active until the vehicle reaches
62 mph (100 km/h), at which point the ESC system will
4. Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
return to its current ESC mode.
5. Make sure the steering wheel is pointing straight.
Launch control will abort before launch completion,
6. Hold the brake and make sure the vehicle is in display “Launch Aborted” in the cluster under any the
“Drive”.
following conditions:
7. While holding the brake, rapidly apply the accelerator • The accelerator pedal is released during launch.
pedal to wide open throttle. The engine speed will
hold at the RPM that was set in the “Launch RPM • The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer
moving in a straight line.
Set-up” screen.
NOTE: Messages will appear in the Driver Information • The “ESC OFF” button is pressed to change the system
to another mode.
Display (DID) to inform the driver if one or more of the
above conditions have not been met.
NOTE: After launch control has been aborted, ESC will
8. When conditions 5 through 8 have been met, the return to its current ESC mode.
Driver Information Display (DID) will read “Launch
Ready Release Brake”.
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
4. Make sure the vehicle is not moving.
Vehicles with a manual transmission have an adjustable
launch RPM controlled through the Uconnect® system.
5. Make sure the steering wheel is pointing straight.
Launch Control is only available when the following
procedure is followed:
6. Fully depress the clutch pedal and make sure the
vehicle is in first gear.
7. While holding the clutch depressed, rapidly apply the
accelerator pedal to wide open throttle. The engine
speed will hold at the pre-selected launch RPM. The
engine speed will hold at the RPM that was set in the
NOTE: Pushing the SRT button on the center stack or
“Launch RPM Set-up” screen.
pressing the “SRT & Apps” button on the touchscreen are
two other options to access launch control features. NOTE: Messages will appear in the Driver Information
Please refer to “Uconnect® Settings” within your Own- Display (DID) to inform the driver if one or more of the
er’s Manual on the DVD for further information.
above conditions have not been met.
1. Pressing the “LAUNCH” button on the center stack
switch bank.
2. Press the “Launch RPM Set-Up” button on the touch- 8. When conditions 5 through 8 have been met, the
screen. This screen will allow you to adjust your
Driver Information Display (DID) will read “Launch
launch RPM’s for optimum launch/traction.
Ready Release Clutch”. Release the clutch quickly and
3. Press the “Activate Launch Mode” button on the
touchscreen.
5
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
continue to hold wide open throttle to launch execute • The “ESC OFF” button is pressed to change the ESC
shifts. Refer to “Manual Transmission – Shifting” in
system to another mode.
this section for further information.
NOTE: After launch control has been aborted, ESC will
Release the brake and continue to hold wide open return to its current ESC mode.
throttle to launch.
9. Keep the vehicle pointed straight.
Launch control will be active until the vehicle reaches
62 mph (100 km/h), at which point the ESC system will
return to its current ESC mode.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to shift when the drive wheels are
spinning and do not have traction. Damage to the
transmission may occur.
Launch control will abort before launch completion, Guidelines For Track Use
display “Launch Aborted” in the cluster and return to
NOTE: Because of the extreme conditions encountered
ESC Full ON under any the following conditions:
during track use, any damage or wear associated with
• The brake is applied during launch.
track use is not covered by warranty.
• The ESC system detects that the vehicle is no longer • If your SRT vehicle is equipped with Drive Modes they
moving in a straight line.
will alter the vehicle’s performance in various driving
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
•
•
•
•
situations. It is recommended that your vehicle oper- • If equipped with a removable lower front fascia grille,
ates in SPORT or TRACK modes during the track
it is recommended to remove it for track use during
event.
warm/hot weather to improve cooling airflow to
critical powertrain and cooling system components.
Prior to each track event/day, verify all fluids are at
the correct levels. Refer to “Fluid Capactites” in Main- • All SRT vehicles are track tested for 24 hours of
taining Your Vehicle for further information.
endurance, however, it is recommended that suspension system, brake system, prop shaft, and ½ shaft
Prior to each track event, verify the front and rear
boots should be checked for wear or damage after
brake pads have more than ½ pad thickness remainevery track event.
ing. If the brake pads require changing, please burnish
prior to track outing at full pace.
• Track usage results in increased operating temperatures of the engine, transmission, clutch – if equipped,
At the conclusion of each track event, it is recomdriveline and brake system. This may affect noise
mended that a brake bleed procedure is performed to
(NVH) countermeasures designed into your vehicle.
maintain the pedal feel and stopping capability of your
New components may need to be installed to return
Brembo High Performance brake system.
the system to the original NVH performance.
It is recommended that each track outing should end
• Tire pressure:
with a minimum of 1 cool down lap using minimal
• 40psi hot, recommend 32psi front, 30psi rear cold
braking.
5
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: It is recommended that you target 40psi Hot Tire
do a two lap cool down with minimal brake applies.
Pressure at the conclusion of each track session. Starting
Make sure the brakes are not smoking. If they are, do
at 32psi Front & 30psi Rear Cold and adjusting based on
another cool down lap.
ambient & track conditions is recommended. Tire pres3. Do not continue for more than 1 full burnishing lap
sure can be monitored via the Driver Information Display
after you start smelling the brakes. Do not get them
(DID) and can assist with adjustments.
smoking heavily. This will get them too hot and affect
their life negatively in future track use.
Track burnishing your brakes:
4. Allow vehicle to sit and cool in the paddock for at least
To avoid “green lining fade” during track use, the brake
30 min. If an infrared thermal gun is available, allow
pads and rotors must have a thermal burnish for factory
rotors to cool to 200°F before going back out.
installed components or when new brake friction com5. There should be a thin, ash layer when inspecting the
ponents are installed:
pads installed in the caliper. Having the ash layer go
1. Use one track session to burnish brakes by driving at
more than half the thickness of the pad material
75% speed. Brake at approximately 0.60-0.80g max
indicates too aggressive of a burnish.
without ABS intervention.
2. Lap the track in this manner until you start smelling
the brakes. Continue for another ½ lap at speed, then
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
6. Sometimes, a second burnish session is required. If the DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
pads start smelling in the next track session, reduce
Acceleration
speed and braking decel to burnish targets and follow
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slipstep 2-4.
pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull
7. New pads installed on old rotors still need to be erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs
burnished. New rotors installed with old pads should when there is a difference in the surface traction under
be burnished at the track or street driven for 300 city the rear (driving) wheels.
miles to develop an adequate lining transfer layer on
the rotor surface prior to track use.
WARNING!
8. Rotors that pulsate during track use should be replaced. Resurfacing of the rotors is not recommended,
as it removes mass from the rotor, reducing its thermal
capacity. Resurfacing also thins the rotor cheek, making it less robust and increasing the likelihood of
pulsation in further track use.
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
5
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate,
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for improved handling.
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping DRIVING THROUGH WATER
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precauDriving through water more than a few inches/
tions should be observed:
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
slushy.
Traction
• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
• Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
• Keep tires properly inflated.
• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a
sudden stop.
CAUTION!
• Due to lower ground clearance, driving your vehicle up steep driveways, approach ramps or near
parking blocks may cause damage to the front
fascia and ground effects.
• Driving through snow more than 4 inches (100 mm)
deep may cause damage to the front fascia and
ground effects.
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions
and Warnings before doing so.
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping
distances. Therefore, after driving through standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the
brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
5
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage
to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always
inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,
fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after
driving through standing water. Do not continue to
operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
POWER STEERING — 6.4L ENGINE
The electric power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If
the electric steering system experiences a fault that
prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the
ability to steer the vehicle manually.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE POWER STEERING” or the “POWER
STEERING ASSIST OFF – SERVICE SYSTEM”
message is displayed within the Driver Information Display (DID), this indicates the vehicle needs to
be taken to the dealer for service. Refer to “Driver
Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Alternate electric power steering efforts can be selected NOTE:
through the Uconnect® System. Refer to the “Drive • Even if the power steering assistance is no longer
Modes” in this section for further information.
operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.
Under these conditions there will be a substantial
WARNING!
increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
Continued operation with reduced assist could pose
a safety risk to yourself and others. Service should be • If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for
obtained as soon as possible.
service.
5
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
POWER STEERING — 6.2L SUPERCHARGED
ENGINE
The hydraulic power steering system is sport tuned and
will give you good vehicle response and increased ease of
maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will provide
mechanical steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it
does not in any way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting • When the parking brake is applied and the transmisoff four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load
sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will
and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no
flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound
driver inputs or additional driving skills required.
to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full
functionality after a battery disconnect.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
PARKING BRAKE
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
brake is fully applied and place the shift lever in the
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
PARK or REVERSE (manual transmission only) position. with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
When the parking brake is applied and the ignition before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
switch is in the ON position (RUN position with Keyless on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
Enter-N-Go™), the “Brake Warning Light” in the instru- difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
ment cluster will illuminate.
not in the vehicle.
5
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the The foot operated parking brake is located below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To release the lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
parking brake, pull the parking brake release handle.
park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully. To
release the parking brake, press the park brake pedal a
second time and let your foot up as you feel the brake
disengage.
Manual Transmission Parking Brake Release
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
WARNING!
Automatic Transmission Parking Brake
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Key
Fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to
be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal
or the shift lever.
(Continued)
5
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or
in a location accessible to children), and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go™ in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also be certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the vehicle to roll
and cause damage or injury.
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with the
parking brake released, a brake system malfunction
is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by an
authorized dealer immediately.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident
by increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the “Brake Warning Light.”
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine
OFF) the brakes will still function. The effort required to
brake the vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
(BAS), and the Electronic Stability Control (ESC). These
systems work together to enhance both vehicle stability
and control in various driving conditions.
An additional electronic brake control feature called Hill
Start Assist (HSA) is standard on manual transmission
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a high perfor- models.
mance braking system. The brake pads are a semiAnti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
metallic compound, which offer superior fade resistance
for consistent operation. A compromise to using this type The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased
of brake pad is that the brakes may produce more brake vehicle stability and brake performance under most
dust and may squeal slightly under certain weather and braking conditions. The system automatically “pumps”
operating conditions (.i.e., during light brake applica- the brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
tions) this is considered normal conditions.
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) prevents
the rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic control of available braking forces applied to the rear
brake control system commonly referred to as ESC. This axle.
system includes the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), the
Traction Control System (TCS), the Brake Assist System
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
5
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you • A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
of the stop
related motor noises. These noises are the system per- These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
forming its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the
WARNING!
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or • The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susstopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can inceptible to interference caused by improperly include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
stalled or high output radio transmitting
debris, or panic stops.
equipment. This interference can cause possible
You also may experience the following when the brake
loss of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
system goes into anti-lock:
such equipment should be performed by qualified
professionals.
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop)
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves
• Brake pedal pulsations
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of
the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
• The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) cannot prevent
collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner, that could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
(Continued)
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The “Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light” monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The
light will come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “ABS Warning Light” remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
5
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
brake system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the “Brake Warning
Light” is not on.
If the “ABS Warning Light” is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “ABS Warning Light”
does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to
the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon as
possible.
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
A feature of the TCS system, Brake Limited Differential
(BLD), controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one
wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the other,
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel.
This will allow more engine torque to be applied to the
wheel that is not spinning. This feature remains active
even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial Off” or “Full Off”
modes. Refer to “Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in
this section for more information.
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning
Light” remain on, the ABS and EBD systems are not Brake Assist System (BAS)
functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is This system complements the ABS by optimizing the
required.
vehicle braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. This system detects an emergency braking
Traction Control System (TCS)
situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake appliThis system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
cation and then applies optimum pressure to the brakes.
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
This can help reduce braking distances.
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you
must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the
stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. The
BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that
could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle
during this short period of time, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The
system will release brake pressure in proportion to
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in
the intended direction of travel.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
5
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Vehicle must be on a 3% (approximate) for manual HSA Off
transmission and 6% (approximate) for automatic If you wish to turn off the HSA system, it can be done in
transmissions.
the Uconnect® settings. Refer to #Uconnect® Settings# in
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e., #Understanding Your Instrument Panel# for further inforvehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle back- mation.
ing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
WARNING!
There may be situations on minor hills with a loaded
vehicle, or while pulling a trailer, when the system
will not activate and slight rolling may occur. This
could cause a collision with another vehicle or object.
Always remember the driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESC
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
The ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
does not match the intended path, the ESC applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the condition of oversteer or understeer.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe,
attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents.
The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
ESC Operating Modes
The Electronic Stability Control System (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on
the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
all accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces,
or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents
(Continued)
The ESC system has four available operating modes:
Street Mode
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. The ESC should only be turned OFF for
specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
5
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
Sport Mode
NOTE:
Sport Mode is intended for times when a more spirited • To enter Sport ESC mode momentarily press the #ESC
driving experience is desired. It is also can be useful
Off# switch, or use the buttons on the Drive modes
when wheel-slip may be desired such as driving out of
pages in the radio. Pressing the #ESC off# switch again
deep snow, sand, or gravel. This mode disables the TCS
with cycle through to Track ESC mode. Pressing the
portion of the ESC and raises the threshold for ESC
#ESC off# button a third time will bring ESC back to
activation, which allows for more wheel spin than what
Street Mode.
ESC normally allows.
• To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving with
Track Mode
snow chains, or when starting off in deep snow, sand,
or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Sport
Track Mode is intended to be used when driving on a
Mode” by momentarily pressing the “ESC Off” switch.
track. This raises the threshold for ESC activation further
Once the situation requiring “Sport Mode” is overthan Sport and also has track tuned TCS to improve
come, turn the ESC ON again by momentarily pressing
vehicle performance while on a road course type track.
the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while the
vehicle is in motion.
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
WARNING!
When in “Sport/Track” mode, the TCS portion of
ESC, except for the limited wheel spin feature described in the TCS section, has been disabled and the
“ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When
in “Sport/Track” mode, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
Full Off
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
this mode, all TCS and ESC stability features are turned
OFF. To enter the “Full Off” mode, press and hold the
“ESC Off” switch for five seconds while the vehicle is
stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a
chime will sound, the #ESC OFF Indicator Light# will
illuminate, and the “ESC off” message will appear in the
Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information. To turn ESC ON
again, momentarily press the “ESC Off” switch.
NOTE: The #ESC off# message will display and the
audible chime will sound when the shift lever is moved
into the PARK position from any position other than
PARK and then moved out of the PARK position. This
will occur when the message was previously cleared.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled. Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESC is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the
ESC system will not engage to assist in maintaining
stability. $ESC Off$ mode is intended for off-highway
or off-road use only.
5
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When the ESC is switched SPORT, the BLD
system remains active. This feature controls wheel spin
across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential.
If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other,
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel
and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. To improve the vehicle’s traction
when driving with tire chains, or when starting off in
deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch
to the “Sport Mode” by momentarily pressing the “ESC
Off” switch.
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
ESC OFF Indicator Light
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
when the ignition switch is cycled to the ON/
RUN position. It should go out with the engine
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
NOTE:
Synchronizing ESC
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN
position, the ESC system will be ON even if it was
cycled off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
that caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is partially
off or full off.
If the power supply is interrupted (battery
disconnected or discharged), the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” may
illuminate with the engine running. If this
should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to the
left and then to the right. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” should go out. However, if
the light remains on, have the ESC and BAS checked at
your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
5
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
NOTE:
Tire Markings
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter #P# is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
emergency use only. Temporary high pressure comstandards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
$....blank....$ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
5
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
– #R# means radial construction, or
– #D# means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
EXAMPLE:
– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)
tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
5
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 03 means the 3rd week
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
– 01 means the year 2001
– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located
behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three
hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the
recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
5
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
spare tires.
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Loading
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading 1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, 2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on 3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pasGAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
5
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will NOTE:
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The followis 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 lbs (68 kg) = 750 lbs
ing table shows examples on how to calculate total
(340 kg), and 1400 lbs (635 kg) – 750 lbs (340 kg) =
load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your
650 lbs [295 kg]).
vehicle with varying seating configurations and num5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating
safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
capacity calculated in step 4.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
5
412 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas
are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in overheating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 413
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance
resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability ride.
of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish Tire Inflation Pressures
response or over responsiveness in the steering.
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
NOTE:
driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause door.
erratic and unpredictable steering response.
At least once a month:
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the • Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality
vehicle to drift left or right.
pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual
5
414 STARTING AND OPERATING
judgement when determining proper inflation. Tires The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
may look properly inflated even when they are under- maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sideinflated.
wall.
CAUTION!
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
STARTING AND OPERATING 415
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original combine them with other types of tires.
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operatTire Repair
ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it
meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire
(sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).
5
416 STARTING AND OPERATING
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be
aware these tires are not designed for winter or cold
additional information.
driving conditions. Install winter tires on your vehicle
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced immeroads are covered with ice or snow. For more informadiately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and
tion, contact an authorized dealer.
service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or
All Season Tires — If Equipped
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring, summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary be- adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
tween different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
WARNING!
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and Do not use summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You
could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury
handling of your vehicle.
or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
the possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
STARTING AND OPERATING 417
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
during the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.
checked before using these tire types.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the origi- Tire Spinning
nal equipment tires. Use snow tires When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
only in sets of four; failure to do so spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
may adversely affect the safety and for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stophandling of your vehicle.
ping.
Snow Tires
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should Emergencies” for further information.
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
tire inflation pressures.
5
418 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be 1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes a 1/16 of an inch (2 mm). When the tread is
STARTING AND OPERATING 419
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the with oil, grease, and gasoline.
tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce
Replacement Tires
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replaceThe tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
ment.
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
• Distance driven.
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivahigher, and summer tires typically have a reduced lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main- when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicator.” Refer to the Tire and Loading
tenance schedule is highly recommended.
5
420 STARTING AND OPERATING
Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for
the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety Information section of this
manual for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact your authorized tire
dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions
you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure
to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 421
WARNING! (Continued)
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices
are not recommended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
CAUTION!
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
5
422 STARTING AND OPERATING
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain Tire Rotation — Same tire size on front and rear
mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to a axle
smooth, quiet ride.
The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper with all season tires is the “forward-cross” as shown in
maintenance intervals. Remember, more frequent rota- the following diagram.
tion is permissible if desired. Also, correct for anything
causing rapid or unusual wear prior to performing the
tire rotation.
Tire Rotation
STARTING AND OPERATING 423
Tire Rotation — Different tire size on front and
rear axle
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
The suggested rotation method is the “side-to-side” as driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recomshown in the following diagram. This method is required mended cold placard pressure.
due to different size tires on the front and rear of the
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1
vehicle.
psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when
the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information”
in “Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
Tire Rotation
5
424 STARTING AND OPERATING
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
there should be no adjustment for this increased pres- above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
sure.
this information.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects
and natural pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure to the
recommended cold placard pressure in order for the
“TPM Telltale Light” to turn off. The system will automatically update and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn
off once the system receives the updated tire pressures.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “TPM
Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 27 psi (186 kPa), but the
“TPM Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value.
STARTING AND OPERATING 425
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to your local dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the TPM sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the “TPM Telltale Light.”
5
426 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure, • Various TPMS messages, which display in the Driver
Information Display (DID), and
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
• TPM Telltale Light
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver module,
• Four TPM sensors,
TPMS Display
STARTING AND OPERATING 427
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The “TPM Telltale Light” will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will sound when
tire pressure is low in one or more of the four active road
tires. In addition, the DID will display a “LOW TIRE”
message and a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values shown in a
different color. An #Inflate Tire to XX# message will also
be displayed in the DID display.
original color, and the “TPM Telltale Light” will turn off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
Service TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the “TPM Telltale Light” will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
The system fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
DID will display a #SERVICE TPM SYSTEM# message for
a minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible in place of the pressure value to indicate which sensor is
and inflate all of the tires with a low pressure condition not being received.
(those shown in a different color in the DID graphic) to
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflaproviding the system fault still exists. If the system fault
tion value as shown in the #Inflate Tire to XX# message.
no longer exists, the “TPM Telltale Light” will no longer
Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the
flash, and the #SERVICE TPM SYSTEM# message will no
system will automatically update, the graphic display in
the DID will return the pressure values shown to their
5
428 STARTING AND OPERATING
longer display, and a pressure value will display in place message is then followed with a graphic display with
of the dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of the pressure values still shown. This indicates that the presfollowing:
sure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the #SERVICE TPM SYSTEM# message is displayed.
the TPM sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a TPM sensor.
Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
the compact spare tire.
wheel housings.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warn5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
ing limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, the
“TPM Telltale Light” will remain ON and a chime will
The DID will also display a #SERVICE TPM SYSTEM#
sound. In addition, the graphic in the DID will still
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
display the low pressure values in a different color and
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
the #Inflate Tire to XX# message.
detected. In this case, the #SERVICE TPM SYSTEM#
STARTING AND OPERATING 429
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
addition, the DID will display a #SERVICE TPM
TPMS to receive this information.
SYSTEM# message for a minimum of five seconds and
General Information
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
4. For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
sound, the “TPM Telltale Light” will flash on and off following conditions:
for 75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the DID
will display a #SERVICE TPM SYSTEM# message for a • This device may not cause harmful interference.
minimum of five seconds and then display dashes (- -) • This device must accept any interference received,
in place of the pressure value.
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare, The TPM sensors are regulated under one of the followthe TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the ing licenses:
“TPM Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the graphic in
MRXSSW4
the DID will display a new pressure value instead of United States
dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the Canada
2546A-SSW4
5
430 STARTING AND OPERATING
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the World6.2L Supercharged And 6.4L Engine
wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
The 6.2L supercharged engine and 6.4L and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recomengine is designed to meet all emissions mends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC speciregulations and provide excellent fuel fications if they are available.
economy and performance when using
Reformulated Gasoline
high-quality premium unleaded gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
with an octane rating of 91 or higher.
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
Reformulated gasoline contain oxygenates and are speyour engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and imhigh speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
prove air quality.
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experi- The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasoence these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline line. Properly blended reformulated gasoline will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
before considering service for the vehicle.
fuel system components.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
STARTING AND OPERATING 431
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy- Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gasogenates such as Ethanol.
line containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher
ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
blends may result in starting and drivability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline containing
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may
not be covered under New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.
5
432 STARTING AND OPERATING
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
E-85 perform the following:
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
• Drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer).
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
• Change the engine oil and oil filter.
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
• Disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal
engine controller memory.
and California reformulated gasoline.
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
Materials Added To Fuel
exposure to E-85 fuel.
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
MMT In Gasoline
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT) detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is conditions and they would result in additional cost.
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage fuel.
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
STARTING AND OPERATING 433
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
(Continued)
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
5
434 STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. Use a finger to pull open the door.
If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is for use with this vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING 435
CAUTION!
Fuel Fill Cap
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impurities
into the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
(Continued)
5
436 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn
on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure
that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is
refueled.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Driver
Information Display (DID). If this occurs, tighten the fuel
filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER
button to turn off the message. If the problem continues,
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is
started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 437
VEHICLE LOADING
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
the “Vehicle Certification Label”. This information • Type of Vehicle
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
the drivers side B-Pillar or the rear of the driver’s door. load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
The label contains the following information:
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
• Name of manufacturer
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
• Month and year of manufacture
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
5
438 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
The best way to figure out the total weight of your driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
it is not over the GVWR.
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
STARTING AND OPERATING 439
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed TRAILER TOWING
to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR Trailer towing with this vehicle is not recommended.
and GAWRs.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
Wheels OFF The
Ground
None
Front
Rear
All
NOTE: When recreationally towing your vehicle, always
follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state
and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional
details.
Manual Transmission
Automatic Transmission
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT RECOMMENDED
OK
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT RECOMMENDED
OK
5
440 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Recreational towing (with rear wheels on the ground) is
NOT ALLOWED. The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle
trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground.
Recreational towing (with rear wheels on the ground) is
NOT ALLOWED. The only acceptable method for towing this vehicle (behind another vehicle) is on a vehicle
trailer with all four wheels OFF the ground.
Use of a towing dolly (with rear wheels on the ground) is
NOT ALLOWED, as severe transmission damage will
occur. Use of a towing dolly (with front wheels on the
ground) is not recommended, as vehicle damage may
occur.
Use of a towing dolly (with rear wheels on the ground) is
NOT ALLOWED, as severe transmission damage will
occur. Use of a towing dolly (with front wheels on the
ground) is not recommended, as vehicle damage may
occur.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
! HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .442 ! JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .456
! IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
! WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
! TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . .445
! FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
! MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
▫ Tire Service Kit Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 ! TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .465
▫ Tire Service Kit Components And Operation . .446
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions. . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
▫ Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . .450
6
442 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located in the may wear down your battery.
switch bank near the bottom center of the instrument IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
panel.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning potential for overheating by taking the appropriate acflasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- tion.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming
• On the highways — slow down.
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for an impending overheat condition:
other motorists.
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 443
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F
(116°C) or greater pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range 200–
230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F
(116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure
that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any
time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the
vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a
properly calibrated torque wrench.
6
444 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
111 Ft-Lbs (150 N·m)
M14 x 1.50
Lug Nut/
Bolt Socket
Size
22 mm
**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug
nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before
tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting
the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each
nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 445
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Torque Patterns
Small punctures up to ¼” (6 mm) in the tire tread can be
sealed with Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire Service
Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F (-20°C).
After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be
sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated This kit will provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you
against the wheel.
to drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km) with a
maximum speed of 55 mph (90 km/h).
6
446 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tire Service Kit Storage
Tire Service Kit Components And Operation
The Tire Service Kit is located in the trunk.
Tire Service Kit Components
Tire Service Kit Location
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Sealant Bottle
Deflation Button
Pressure Gauge
Power Button
5 — Mode Select Knob
6 — Sealant Hose (Clear)
7 — Air Pump Hose (Black)
8 — Power Plug (located on
the bottom side of the Tire
Service Kit)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 447
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the following
symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button (4) once to
turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release
the Power Button (4) again to turn Off the Tire
Service Kit.
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to
this position for air pump operation only. Use Using The Deflation Button
the Black Air Pump Hose (7) when selecting
Press the Deflation Button (2) to reduce the air
this mode.
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and
turn to this position to inject the Tire
Service Kit Sealant and to inflate the
tire. Use the Sealant Hose (clear hose)
(6) when selecting this mode.
6
448 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle (1) and
Sealant Hose (6) prior to the expiration date (printed at
the lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system. Refer to
“Sealing a Tire with Tire Service Kit” section (F)
“Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location
• The Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6) are a one
tire application use and need to be replaced after each
use. Always replace these components immediately at
your original equipment vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid form,
clean water, and a damp cloth will remove the material
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 449
from the vehicle or tire and wheel components. Once
the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the valve stem
on the wheel is free of debris before connecting the Tire
Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to inflate
bicycle tires. The kit also comes with two needles,
located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the
bottom of the air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts,
or similar inflatable items. However, use only the Air
Pump Hose (7) and make sure the Mode Select Knob
(5) is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to
avoid injecting sealant into them. The Tire Service Kit
Sealant is only intended to seal punctures less than ¼”
(6 mm) diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of the
vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough off the
road to avoid the danger of being hit when using
the Tire Service Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the vehicle
under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is approximately
1/4” (6 mm) or larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from driving with
extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from driving on a flat
tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of the tire or
the wheel.
(Continued)
6
450 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open flames or
heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the occupants
of the vehicle. Always stow the Tire Service Kit in
the place provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to
you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of Tire Service
Kit to come in contact with hair, eyes, or clothing.
Tire Service Kit is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes skin, eye,
and respiratory irritation. Flush immediately with
plenty of water if there is any contact with eyes or
skin. Change clothing as soon as possible, if there
is any contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In
case of an allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of
reach of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink plenty of
water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
(Continued)
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
(A) Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the vehicle’s
Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with the
deflated tire) is in a position that is near to the ground.
This will allow the Tire Service Kit Hoses (6) and (7) to
reach the valve stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 451
on the ground. This will provide the best positioning 4. Remove the cap from the valve stem and then screw
the fitting at the end of the Sealant Hose (6) onto the
of the kit when injecting the sealant into the deflated
valve stem.
tire and running the air pump. Move the vehicle as
necessary to place the valve stem in this position
5. Uncoil the Power Plug (8) and insert the plug into the
before proceeding.
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Place the transmission in PARK (auto transmission) or
NOTE: Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
in Gear (manual transmission) and place the ignition
nails) from the tire.
in the OFF position.
(C) Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
4. Set the parking brake.
Deflated Tire:
(B) Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
• Always start the engine before turning ON the Tire
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the
Service Kit.
Sealant Mode position.
NOTE: Manual transmission vehicles must have the
2. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) and then remove the cap parking brake engaged and the shift lever in NEUTRAL.
from the fitting at the end of the hose.
• After pressing the Power Button (4), the sealant (white
3. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground next to the
fluid) will flow from the Sealant Bottle (1) through the
deflated tire.
Sealant Hose (6) and into the tire.
6
452 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
NOTE: Sealant may leak out through the puncture in the NOTE: If the Mode Select Knob (5) is on Air Mode and
tire.
the pump is operating, air will dispense from the Air
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0 – 10 Pump Hose (7) only, not the Sealant Hose (6).
seconds through the Sealant Hose (6):
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn Off the Tire Service Sealant Hose (6):
Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the valve 1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no
stem. Make sure the valve stem is free of debris.
longer flowing through hose (typically takes 30 - 70
Reconnect the Sealant Hose (6) to the valve stem.
seconds). As the sealant flows through the Sealant
Check that the Mode Select Knob (5) is in the Sealant
Hose (6), the Pressure Gauge (3) can read as high as 70
Mode position and not Air Mode. Press the Power
psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge (3) will decrease
Button (4) to turn On the Tire Service Kit.
quickly from approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the
actual tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle (1) is
2. Connect the Power Plug (8) to a different 12 Volt
empty.
power outlet in your vehicle or another vehicle, if
available. Make sure the engine is running before 2. The pump will start to inject air into the tire immediturning ON the Tire Service Kit.
ately after the Sealant Bottle (1) is empty. Continue to
operate the pump and inflate the tire to the pressure
3. The Sealant Bottle (1) may be empty due to previous
indicated on the tire pressure label on the driver-side
use. Call for assistance.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 453
latch pillar (recommended pressure). Check the tire 3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose (6) from the
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge (3).
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end of
the hose, and place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar)
storage location. Quickly proceed to (D) “Drive Vepressure within 15 minutes:
hicle.”
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
CAUTION!
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure or is at
least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn off the Tire Service
Kit.
2. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the top of the
Sealant Bottle (1) and place the sticker on the instrument panel.
• The metal end fitting from Power Plug (8) may get
hot after use, so it should be handled carefully.
• Failure to reinstall the cap on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) can result in sealant contacting your skin, clothing, and the vehicle’s interior. It can also result in sealant contacting internal
Tire Service Kit components which may cause
permanent damage to the kit.
6
454 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
(D) Drive Vehicle:
(E) After Driving:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop
drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to ensure to Use Tire Service Kit” before continuing.
distribution of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
1. Push in the Mode Select Knob (5) and turn to the Air
Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h).
Mode position.
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire repair.
Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after
using Tire Service Kit. Do not exceed 55 mph (90
km/h) until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that are
serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others
around you.
2. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug into the
vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
3. Uncoil the Air Pump Hose (7) (black in color) and
screw the fitting at the end of hose (7) onto the valve
stem.
4. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the Pressure
Gauge (3).
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive
the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 455
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the instrument
panel after the tire has been repaired.
1. Press the Power Button (4) to turn on Tire Service Kit
and inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire 6. Replace the Sealant Bottle (1) and Sealant Hose (6)
and loading information label on the driver-side door
assembly at your authorized dealer as soon as posopening.
sible. Refer to (F) “Sealant Bottle and Hose Replacement”.
NOTE: If the tire becomes over-inflated, press the Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recom- NOTE: When having the tire serviced, advise the authomended inflation pressure before continuing.
rized dealer or service center that the tire has been sealed
using the Tire Service Kit.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the valve stem,
reinstall the cap on the valve stem and unplug from 12 (F) Sealant Bottle And Hose Replacement:
Volt outlet.
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose (6) (clear in color).
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper storage area in
2. Locate the round Sealant Bottle release button in the
the vehicle.
recessed area under the sealant bottle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced at the
3. Press the Sealant Bottle release button. The Sealant
earliest opportunity at an authorized dealer or tire
Bottle (1) will pop up. Remove the bottle and dispose
service center.
of it accordingly.
6
456 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
4. Clean any remaining sealant from the Tire Service Kit pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
housing.
5. Position the new Sealant Bottle (1) in the housing so NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
that the Sealant Hose (6) aligns with the hose slot in follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
the front of the housing. Press the bottle into the precautions.
housing. An audible click will be heard indicating the
bottle is locked into place.
CAUTION!
6. Verify that the cap is installed on the fitting at the end
of the Sealant Hose (6) and return the hose to its
storage area (located on the bottom of the air pump).
7. Return the Tire Service Kit to its storage location in the
vehicle.
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
alternator or electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 457
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery is stored under an access cover in the trunk.
Remote battery posts are located on the right side of the
engine compartment for jump-starting.
6
Remote Battery Posts Locations
1 — Remote Positive (+) Post
2 — Remote Negative (-) Post
458 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is ON. You can be injured by
moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch
bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent
electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift into PARK (automatic
transmission) or 1st gear (manual transmission) and
place the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could
result in personal injury or property damage due to
battery explosion.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 459
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)
post of the discharged battery. The resulting electrical
spark could cause the battery to explode and could
result in personal injury. Only use the specific ground
point, do not use any other exposed metal parts.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
remote positive (+) post of the vehicle with the disbattery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
charged battery.
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
battery.
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the
in the reverse sequence:
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable
cable to the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
from the remote negative (-) post of the vehicle with
the discharged battery.
the discharged battery.
6
460 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
CAUTION! (Continued)
the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the remote positive (+) post of the vehicle FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
with the discharged battery.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
you should have the battery and charging system in- steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. For vehicles with automatic transmission,
spected at your authorized dealer.
press and hold the lock button on the shift lever. Then
shift back and forth between DRIVE and REVERSE (with
CAUTION!
automatic transmission) or FIRST GEAR and REVERSE
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets (with manual transmission), while gently pressing the
draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without
plugged in long enough without engine operation, spinning the wheels or racing the engine.
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 461
NOTE: For vehicles with automatic transmission: Shifts
between DRIVE and REVERSE can only be achieved at
wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the
transmission remains in NEUTRAL for more than 2
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to engage
DRIVE or REVERSE.
NOTE: Press the #ESC Off# switch to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in #Partial Off# mode
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the #ESC
Off# switch again to restore #ESC On# mode.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE / 1ST GEAR and REVERSE, do not
spin the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
drivetrain damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
6
462 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED
TRANSMISSION
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the
parking brake, before activating the Manual Park
Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will
allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by
the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow
vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the
transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead
battery), a Manual Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 463
2. Remove the console storage bin to access the Manual 4. Insert the screwdriver into the slot in the center of the
Park Release lever.
lever, and disengage the lever locking tab by pushing
it to the right.
6
Console Storage Bin
Locking Tab
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, fish the
tether strap up through the opening in the console 5. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged
base.
position, pull the tether strap to rotate the lever up and
rearward until it locks in place in the vertical position.
464 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed. To Reset The Manual Park Release:
Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is
1. Push the latch (at the base of the lever, on the rear side)
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
rearward (away from the lever) to unlatch the lever.
2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward and
down, to its original position, until the locking tab
snaps into place to secure the lever.
3. Pull up gently on the tether strap to confirm that the
lever is locked in its stowed position.
4. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the console.
Reinstall the console storage bin.
Tether Strap
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 465
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift or Dolly
Tow
Flatbed
Wheels OFF The
Ground
NONE
Front
Rear
ALL
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max
speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max
distance
NOT ALLOWED
NOT RECOMMENDED
BEST METHOD
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
If transmission is operable:
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• 30 mph (48 km/h) max
speed
• 30 miles (48 km) max
distance
NOT ALLOWED
NOT RECOMMENDED
BEST METHOD
6
466 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent
damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other
equipment designed for this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to
main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers
or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding
vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.
Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may occur from improper
towing.
• The manufacturer does not recommend towing this
vehicle using a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may
occur.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 467
Automatic Transmission
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all
four wheels on the ground) under the following condiIf the key fob is unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is
tions:
discharged, refer to “Manual Park Release” in this section
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
for instructions on shifting the automatic transmission
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km). out of PARK for towing.
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must
be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 30
miles (48 km), then the only acceptable method of
towing is with a flatbed truck.
6
468 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Manual Transmission
The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmission is operable, the vehicle may be flat towed (with all
four wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:
• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
• The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles (48 km).
• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
If the transmission is not operable, then the only acceptable method of towing is with a flatbed truck.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe engine and/or transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
! ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.2L
SUPERCHARGED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
! ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L
(392 HEMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
! ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . .473
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
! EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .474
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
! REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
! DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489
! MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .476
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
7
470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
▫ Clutch Hydraulic System (Manual Transmission)
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
Park/Turn Lamp — Models with Halogen
Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . .501
▫ Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and
Park/Turn Lamp — Models with High Intensity
Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If Equipped. . .526
▫ Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
▫ Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
▫ Center Tail/Backup Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . .501
! FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510
▫ Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .510
▫ Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . .516
! VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
! REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
! BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
▫ Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
▫ Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) . .527
▫ License Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
! FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
! FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE
PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.2L SUPERCHARGED
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
Intercooler Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Fill
Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
7 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
8 — Air Cleaner Filter
9 — Power Steering Reservoir
10 — Engine Oil Dipstick
11 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
12— Washer Fluid Reservoir
472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L (392 HEMI)
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump Start (Positive Battery Post)
Remote Jump Start (Negative Battery Post)
Engine Oil Dipstick
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
6 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
7— Engine Coolant Reservoir
8 — Air Cleaner Filter
9 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL). It
will also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
”gASCAP” message will display in the odometer or a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Driver
Information Display (DID). If this occurs, tighten the fuel
filler cap properly and press the Trip Odometer button to
7
474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
turn off the message. If the problem continues, the Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
message will appear the next time the vehicle is started. system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replaceA loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not
may also turn on the MIL.
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which
PROGRAMS
you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system. following:
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do
not crank or start the engine.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not start this test over.
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON
system is ready for testing.
position, you will see the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
happen:
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you place the ignition in the off REPLACEMENT PARTS
position or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed Use of genuine MOPAR® parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ento the I/M station.
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your caused by the use of non-MOPAR® parts for mainteauthorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was nance and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, Limited Warranty.
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
7
476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
penalties being assessed against you.
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components
which may require servicing or replacement in the future.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (.95 L) of
oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
on these engines.
7
478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra™ 0W-40 engine or equivalent MOPAR® oil meeting
the Chrysler Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all
operating temperatures.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Comparttime to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informaRefer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further information. tion.
Change Engine Oil
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental addiUse Pennzoil Ultra™ 0W-40 engine or equivalent
tives.
MOPAR® oil meeting the Chrysler Material Standard
MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.
Engine Oil Change Requirements — 6.2L
Supercharged Engine (If Equipped)
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on We recommend having your oil changed and vehicle
engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart- serviced by your authorized dealer. You should only
ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa- perform maintenance procedures and or repairs for
which you have the knowledge and the right equipment.
tion.
Engine Oil Viscosity
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
Your 6.2L Supercharged engine (if equipped) has a
unique engine oil system. The system contains a drain in
the engine oil pan and the engine oil cooler. It is necessary for the service technician to drain both the engine oil
pan and the engine oil cooler to properly perform the
engine oil change procedure. Failure to drain the engine
oil cooler will result in overfilling your vehicle’s engine
oil system.
7
480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Do not overfill crankcase with engine oil, pressure loss or oil foaming can result.
WARNING!
To access these oil drains, the vehicle needs to be safely
lifted and supported to remove the front underbody
shields (belly pan). Your service technician will refer to
the Service Manual for proper under body shield (belly
pan) removal and installation procedures.
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
Shaker Hood Oil Filler — If Equipped
For vehicles equipped with a “Shaker Hood” the upper
scoop will need to be removed so that oil can be properly
added to the engine.
To do this you will need follow the procedure below:
1. Remove the four nuts with the Shaker tool located in
glove box.
2. Lift off the upper scoop.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481
3. Locate the oil fill cover in base assembly to expose the Engine Oil Filter
oil fill cap.
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
at every engine oil change.
4. Remove oil fill cap to add oil.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Engine Oil Filter Selection
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. MOPAR® engine oil filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
7
482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
maintenance intervals.
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR® engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recomWARNING!
mended.
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine Maintenance-Free Battery
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary You will never have to add water, nor is periodic mainfor repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is tenance required.
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner, NOTE: The battery is stored under an access cover in the
trunk. Remote battery terminals are located in the engine
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
compartment for jump-starting. Refer to “Jump-Starting
serious personal injury.
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further
information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483
WARNING!
Battery Location
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
7
484 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive
(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 485
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If
Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling HFO 1234yf
— If Equipped
HFO 1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product
with a low GWP (Global Warming Potential). However,
the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning service be performed by authorized dealer or other service
facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation.
7
486 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Remove the access door in the cowl screen by pressing
the retaining clips.
Filter Access Cover
3. Remove the used filter.
Access Door
2. Unsnap both ends and lift the filter access cover.
4. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter will indicate this).
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 487
Body Lubrication
A/C Air Filter
5. Close the filter access cover.
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should
be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,
such as MOPAR® Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy
operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to
the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after
lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.
Particular attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When performing
other underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
maintenance intervals.
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR®
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
7
488 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
flush out the residual water.
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
from a dry windshield.
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies dependrating information can be found on most washer fluid
ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor
containers.
performance of blades may be present with chattering,
marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions
are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 489
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 l) of washer have an authorized technician inspect the complete exfluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
the Driver’s Information Display (DID).
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
WARNING!
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
Commercially available windshield washer solvents for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
WARNING!
the washer solution.
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
Exhaust System
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
system.
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
information.
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
(Continued)
7
490 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
CAUTION!
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
(Continued)
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 491
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
NOTE: Your vehicles exhaust system may be equipped
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specificawith an Electronic Exhaust Valve (EEV) system, if the
tions, should be obtained immediately.
exhaust system is replaced with aftermarket products a
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam- Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) may be illuminated.
age:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
7
492 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Coolant Checks
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or place the ignition
in the LOCK position (OFF position for Keyless
Enter-N-Go™). The fan is temperature controlled
and can start at any time the ignition switch is in
the ON position (RUN position for Keyless EnterN-Go™).
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle and/or the supercharger coolant recovery bottle (if equipped with the 6.2L
Supercharged engine) tubing for brittle rubber, cracking,
tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the bottle
and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 493
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE: If equipped with the 6.2L Supercharged engine
the intercooler must be vacuum flushed and filled. If any
coolant is needed to be added to the system please
contact your local authorized dealer.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
NOTE: Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant Selection Of Coolant
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could lead Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
needed to be added to the system please contact your
local authorized dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains
visible sediment, have an authorized dealer clean and
flush with OAT coolant (antifreeze) (conforming to
MS.90032).
7
494 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000
miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 495
you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to mainthat meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stan- tain the proper level of protection against freezing acdard MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze): cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
• We recommend using MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive NOTE:
Technology) that meets the requirements of Chrysler
• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant
Material Standard MS.90032.
properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is
that meets the requirements of Chrysler Material Stanneeded to be added to the system please contact your
dard MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concenlocal authorized dealer.
trations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom−34° F (−37° C) are anticipated.
mended and can result in cooling system damage. If
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionHOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,
ized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
7
496 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Caps
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery tank.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add
engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool
an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding
or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the
system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
NOTE: Be sure you do not mix the engine coolant system
pressure cap with the intercooler system pressure cap Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
these caps are not interchangeable.
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 497
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground not overfill.
spills immediately.
Points To Remember
Coolant Level
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the from the front of the engine compartment. This is norengine OFF and cold, the level of the coolant in the bottle mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporThe radiator normally remains completely full, so there is ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
be checked once a month.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
7
498 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in • Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
the coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antioperation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
freeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
expansion bottle must also be protected against freezresult in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
ing.
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested Brake System
for leaks.
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a system components should be inspected periodically.
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corrosion maintenance intervals.
protection of your engine which contains aluminum
components.
WARNING!
• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 499
WARNING! (Continued)
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “MainCheck the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
taining Your Vehicle” for further information.
if the “Brake Warning Light” indicates system failure.
Master Cylinder — Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the “MAX”
mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
(Continued)
7
500 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
(Continued)
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
Clutch Hydraulic System (Manual Transmission)
— If Equipped
The clutch hydraulic system is fed by a segregated
volume of fluid within the brake system master cylinder
reservoir. In the event of leakage or wear, use only the
manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 501
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Fluid Level Check
Selection Of Lubricant
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the left
side of the transmission. The fluid level should be 1/4
inch (6.4mm) below the bottom of the fill hole. Add fluid,
if necessary, to maintain the proper level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for further information.
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain
the transmission fluid at the correct level using the
recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used
Change Transmission Fluid
in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should
If contaminated with water, change the fluid immedi- be used.
ately. See your authorized dealer for service.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
7
502 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for fluid specifications.
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Special Additives
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
any special additives in the transmission.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
check your transmission fluid level using special service
product and its performance may be impaired by suppletools.
mental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,
policy is the use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the
leaks. Avoid using transmission sealers as they may transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle
adversely affect seals.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 503
with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis- Rear Axle
sion damage.
Fluid Level Check
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Checking the fluid level while the vehicle is on level
ground and has been stationary for 15 minutes will
improve the accuracy of the fluid level reading.
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug on the
axle. The fluid level should be 1-2.5mm below the fill
plug. Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the Change Axle Fluid
life of the vehicle.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How- maintenance intervals.
ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes
contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is
disassembled for any reason.
7
504 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
What Causes Corrosion?
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The most common causes are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
The following maintenance recommendations will enable • Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your veyou to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
hicle in the shade using MOPAR® Car Wash, or a mild
resistance built into your vehicle.
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 505
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu- Special Care
lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR® Super Kleen Bug • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
and Tar Remover to remove.
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR®
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish. • If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274
kPa) can result in damage or removal of paint and
decals.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
7
506 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers, NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well Black Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives or polishing compounds. They will permapackaged and sealed.
nently damage this finish and such damage is not cov• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
ered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE ONLY
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used
• Use MOPAR® Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as on a regular basis this is all that is required to maintain
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to this finish.
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR® Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 507
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of
protectants on Stain Repel products.
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- Interior Care
ner:
Use MOPAR® Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting fabric upholstery and MOPAR® Carpet Cleaner or
equivalent for carpeting.
with a clean, dry towel.
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, or MOPAR® Satin Select or equivalent. Do not use
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR® Total Clean or
harsh cleaners or Armor All®. Use MOPAR® Total Clean
equivalent, or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
or equivalent to clean vinyl upholstery.
cloth and remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent is specifically recomremove soap residue.
mended for leather upholstery.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR® Multi-Purpose
Cleaner or equivalent to a clean, damp cloth and Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
remove the stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
soap residue.
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
7
508 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
and MOPAR® Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR® Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
Cleaning Headlights
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments that may
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
scratch the elements.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 509
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR® Total Clean, a
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
directly on the mirror.
cloth.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
buckles do not work properly.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft rag or micro-fiber towel. A mild
soap solution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used,
wipe clean with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
7
510 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cupholder in the center console.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp
rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse
with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never
replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition
is off and that all the other services are switched off
and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air
bag system, braking system), power unit systems
(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
Front Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
The Front Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment. This module contains fuses and
relays.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 511
CAUTION!
Front Power Distribution Center
Cavity
1
2
Cartridge Fuse
–
40 Amp Green
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
Mini-Fuse
–
–
Description
Fuse – Spare
Radiator Fan #1 – If Equipped
7
512 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
3
Cartridge Fuse
50 Amp Red
Mini-Fuse
–
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
–
20 Amp Blue
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
11
12
13
14
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
–
–
Description
Power Steering #1 / Radiator Fan (6.2L
Supercharged) – If Equipped
Starter
Electronic Stability Control
Electronic Stability Control
Fuse – Spare
Police Ignition Run / ACC # 2
All-Wheel Drive Module – If Equipped
Security – If Equipped / Under hood
Lamp – Police
Horns
Air Conditioning Clutch
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 513
Cavity
15
16
18
19
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
40 Amp Green
50 Amp Red
Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
–
–
20
21
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
–
–
22
40 Amp Green / 20
Amp Blue – Police
30 Amp Pink
20 Amp Blue
–
–
23
24
28
–
–
–
Description
Left HID – If Equipped
Right HID – If Equipped
Radiator Fan #2 – If Equipped
Power Steering #2 / Radiator Fan (6.2L
Supercharged)
Wiper Motor
Headlamp Washers – If Equipped / Police
Feed
Engine Cooling Pump (6.2L Supercharged)
/ Police Bat Feed # 3 – If Equipped
Police Bat Feed # 1 – If Equipped
Police Bat Feed # 3 – If Equipped
Fuse – Spare
7
514 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
29
Cartridge Fuse
–
Mini-Fuse
15 Amp Blue
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
25 Amp Clear
–
–
25 Amp Clear
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
38
39
–
–
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
Description
Transmission Control Module
(LA/LD Police)
Fuse – Spare
Engine Module
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Powertrain #1
Powertrain #2
Anti-Lock Brake Module
Engine Controller/Rad Fan Relays – If
Equipped
Airbag Module
Power Steering Module/AC Clutch Relay
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 515
Cavity
48
Cartridge Fuse
–
Mini-Fuse
10 Amp Red
49
50
51
52
53
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
–
Description
AWD Module/Front Axle Disconnect (LX)
/ Adaptive Cruise (LA) – If Equipped
Fuse – Spare
Fuse – Spare
Vacuum Pump
Adaptive Cruise (LD/LX) – If Equipped
Fuse – Spare
7
516 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
There is also a power distribution center located in the
trunk under the spare tire access panel. This center
contains fuses and relays.
Rear Power Distribution Center
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly
positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may
allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 517
Cavity
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Cartridge Fuse
60 Amp Yellow
—
60 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
40 Amp Green
30 Amp Pink
30 Amp Pink
—
Mini-Fuse
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
20 Amp Yellow
15
16
17
40 Amp Green
20 Amp Blue
—
—
—
—
Description
Front PDC Feed #1
Fuse – Spare
Front PDC Feed #2
Sunroof / Dome Lamp – Police
Exterior Lighting #1
Exterior Lighting #2
Interior Lighting
Power Locks
Driver Door Control Module
Passenger Door Control Module
Dual USB Center Console Rear/
Cigar Lighter IP – If Equipped
HVAC Blower
Left Spot Lamp – Police
Fuse – Spare
7
518 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
18
19
20
21
22
Cartridge Fuse
30 Amp Pink
—
—
30 Amp Pink (6.2L
Supercharged)
25 Amp Clear (LD STD)
—
23
24
25
26
—
—
—
—
27
—
Mini-Fuse
—
—
—
—
20 Amp Yellow – Police
10 Amp Red – LA
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue – LD/LX
25 Amp Clear – LA
30 Amp Green – LA 6.2L
Supercharged
25 Amp Clear
Description
Mod Network Interface – Police
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Fuel Pump (6.2L Supercharged)
Fuel Pump (LD STD)
Right Spot Lamp – Police
Integrated Center Stack – LA
Fuel Door/Diagnostic Port
Integrated Center Stack – LD/LX
Tire Pressure Monitor
Transmission / Electronic Shift Module (LD/LX)
Fuel Pump (LA)
Fuel Pump (LA 6.2L Supercharged)
Amplifier – If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 519
Cavity
31
32
33
Cartridge Fuse
—
—
—
Mini-Fuse
25 Amp Breaker
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
34
—
10 Amp Red
35
36
—
—
5 Amp Tan
15 Amp Blue
37
38
—
—
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue – LD/LX
20 Amp Yellow – LA
40
—
—
Description
Power Seats
HVAC Module/Cluster
Ignition Switch/RF hub Module/
Steering Column Lock-LX If
Equipped
Steering Column Module/Clock/
Spare – Police
Battery Sensor
Electronic Exhaust Valve – If
Equipped
Radio
Console Power Outlet/Console Media Hub (LD/LX)
Power Outlet Inside Arm Rest/
Console Media Hub (LA)
Fuse — Spare
7
520 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
41
42
43
Cartridge Fuse
—
30 Amp Pink
—
Mini-Fuse
—
—
20 Amp Yellow
44
—
10 Amp Red
45
—
15 Amp Blue
46
47
—
—
—
10 Amp Red
48
49
50
—
—
—
20 Amp Yellow
—
—
Description
Fuse — Spare
Rear Defrost
Rear Heated Seats/Steering Wheel
Module
Park Assist / Blind Spot / Rear
View Camera
Cluster / Rearview Mirror /
Compass(LDLX)/Humidity Sensor
Fuse — Spare
Adaptive Front Lighting / Auto
High BEAM / Day Time Running
Lamps- If Equipped
Active Suspension – SRT
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 521
Cavity
51
52
Cartridge Fuse
—
—
Mini-Fuse
20 Amp Yellow
10 Amp Red
53
—
10 Amp Red
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
10 Amp Red
—
—
—
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
5 Amp Tan
20 Amp Yellow
—
—
Description
Front Heated Seats – If Equipped
Heated Cupholders/Rear Heated
Seat Switches – If Equipped
HVAC Module/In Car Temperature
Sensor
Airbag Module (LA)
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
Airbag Module (LD/LX)
Adjustable Pedals – Police
Heated Washer Nozzles (LD)
Cigar Lighter (LA) – If Equipped
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
7
522 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
64
65
66
67
68
Cartridge Fuse
—
—
—
—
—
Mini-Fuse
25 Amp Breaker
10 Amp Red
—
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
69
70
—
—
—
—
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
Description
Rear Windows (LD/LX)
Airbag Module
Fuse — Spare
Rain and Light Sensor/Sunroof
Dual USB Power Outlet – R/A
Sense (LD/LX) Rear Sunshade (LD/
LX)
Fuse — Spare
Fuse — Spare
service (e.g., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 523
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lamps
W5W
Rear Compartment (Trunk) Lamp
562
Overhead Console Reading Lamps
578
Visor Vanity Lamps
A6220
Glove Box Lamp – If Equipped
194
Door Courtesy
562
Shift Indicator Lamp
JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket/Cupholder
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for replacement instructions.
7
524 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Bulbs
Headlamp – High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Halogen Headlamp
Front Park/Turn Lamp
Front Fog Lamp
Front Side Marker
Tail Lamp
Stop/Turn Lamp
Rear Side Marker
Backup Lamp
Center High-Mount Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
License
Bulb Number
D3S (Serviced at Authorized Dealer) *
HIR2LL
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
* The headlamps are a type of high-voltage discharge this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
tube. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to an
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of authorized dealer for service.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 525
BULB REPLACEMENT
4. Turn the headlamp access cap counterclockwise to
remove.
NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmospheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric 5. Remove bulb by turning it counter clockwise and
disconnect.
conditions change to allow the condensation to change
back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually
6. Install new bulb by turning it clockwise and reconnect.
accelerate the clearing process.
7. Reinstall headlamp access cap by turning it clockwise
Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp,
and then reinstall headlamp cover.
Park/Turn Lamp — Models with Halogen
To replace the driver side lamps:
Headlamps — If Equipped
To replace the passenger side lamps:
1. Open the hood.
1. Open the hood.
2. Remove the air cleaner filter cover by removing three
fasteners and loosening the clean air inlet clamp and
then rotate cover off to the side.
2. Remove the headlamp cover.
3. Reach behind the passenger headlamp assembly.
NOTE: The cover has an electrical connector that does
NOTE: The park/turn lamps can also be accessed at this not need to be disconnected if the cover is rotated off to
point.
the side.
7
526 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Remove one fastener on the lower air box to remove Low Beam Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, and
and access the rear of the headlamp assembly.
Park/Turn Lamp — Models with High Intensity
Discharge (HID) Headlamps — If Equipped
4. Reach behind the passenger headlamp assembly.
HID Headlamps
5. Remove the headlamp cover.
The headlamps are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
6. Turn the headlamp access cap counterclockwise to High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
remove.
headlamp switch off and the key removed. Because of
7. Remove bulb by turn it counter clockwise and discon- this, you should not attempt to service a headlamp bulb
yourself. If a headlamp bulb fails, take your vehicle to
nect.
an authorized dealer for service.
8. Install new bulb by turning it clockwise and reconnect.
9. Reinstall headlamp access cap by turning it clockwise
and then reinstall headlamp cover.
10. Reinstall engine air cleaner assembly.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb sockets of
HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned
ON. It may cause serious electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 527
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a blue hue to
the lamps. This diminishes and becomes more white after
approximately 10 seconds, as the system charges.
Front/Rear Side Marker Lamp
Center Tail/Backup Lamp
The Center Tail/Backup Lamp use LED lamps that are
not serviceable separately. The Center Tail/Backup Lamp
must be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized
dealer.
The Side Markers use LED lamps that are not serviceable Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
separately. The Side Markers must be replaced as an The CHMSL uses LED lamps that are not serviceable
assembly, see your authorized dealer.
separately. The CHMSL must be replaced as an assembly,
see your authorized dealer.
Tail/Turn And Stop Lamp
The Tail/Turn and Stop Lamps use LED lamps that are
not serviceable separately. The Tail/Turn and Stop
Lamps must be replaced as an assembly, see your authorized dealer.
License Lamp
The License Lamp use LED lamps that are not serviceable
separately. The License Lamp must be replaced as an
assembly, see your authorized dealer.
7
528 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil With Filter
6.2 Liter Supercharged Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified)
6.4 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40, Synthetic API Certified)
Cooling System *
6.2 Liter Supercharged Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
(OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent)
Intercooler (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
6.4 Liter Engine (MOPAR® Antifreeze/Engine Coolant (OAT coolant
conforming to MS.90032) 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to
U.S.
18.5 Gallons
Metric
70 Liters
6 Quarts
7 Quarts
5.68 Liters
6.6 Liters
15 Quarts
14.4 Liters
4.5 Quarts
4.2 Liters
15 Quarts
14.4 Liters
MAX level.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 529
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine/Intercooler Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000
Mile Formula OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032.
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine
oils.
The manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil UltraTM 0W-40 or
equivalent MOPAR® engine oil meeting the requirements of Chrysler
Material Standard MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.
MOPAR® Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Spark Plugs.
We recommend you use Premium Unleaded 91 Octane or higher.
7
530 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system will
need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh
OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 531
Chassis
Component
Manual Transmission – If
Equipped
Automatic Transmission – If
Equipped
Power Steering Reservoir – If
Equipped
Brake Master Cylinder
Rear Axle
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR® ATF+4® Automatic Transmission
Fluid.
Use only MOPAR® ZF 8&9 Speed ATF™ Automatic Transmission Fluid,
or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
We recommend you use MOPAR® Hydraulic System Power Steering
Fluid or equivalent meeting the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-10838.
We recommend you use MOPAR® DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If
DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you use MOPAR® LSD Synthetic Gear Lubricant SAE
75W85 (API GL-5).
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
! MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .536
8
534 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle
serviced as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles
(805 km).
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in this
manual must be done at the times or mileages specified
to protect your vehicle warranty and ensure the best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent maintenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating NOTE:
conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving. Inspection and service should also be done • The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s oil
anytime a malfunction is suspected.
if it has been six months since your last oil change,
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
illuminated.
The message “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in • Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
the DID and a single chime will sound, indicating that an
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
oil change is necessary.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10,000 km) or six months, whichever comes first.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 535
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator • Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
as required.
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other • Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
master cylinder, and power steering, and add as
referring to the steps described under “Driver Informaneeded.
tion Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
Panel” for further information.
operation.
At Each Stop For Fuel
At Each Oil Change
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Maintenance
Procedures/Engine Oil” in “Maintaining Your Ve- • Change the engine oil filter.
hicle” for further information.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
CAUTION!
required.
Once A Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
8
536 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96
Or Kilometers:
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
170,000
180,000
190,000
200,000
210,000
220,000
230,000
240,000
250,000
150,000
42,000
30
70,000
144,000
36,000
24
60,000
138,000
30,000
18
50,000
132,000
24,000
12
40,000
126,000
18,000
6
30,000
120,000
12,000
Or Months:
20,000
114,000
6,000
108,000
Miles:
10,000
102,000
Maintenance Chart
Change the
engine oil
and engine
oil filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Rotate the
tires, rotate
at the first
sign of irregular
wear, even
if it occurs
before
scheduled
maintenance.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
Or Kilometers:
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
If using
your vehicle
for any of
the following: dusty
or off-road
conditions.
Inspect the
engine air
cleaner filter; replace
if necessary.
X
Inspect the
brake linings; replace if
necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
150,000
96
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
X
X
X
250,000
96,000
90
144,000
90,000
84
240,000
84,000
78
138,000
78,000
72
230,000
72,000
66
132,000
66,000
60
220,000
60,000
54
126,000
54,000
48
210,000
48,000
42
120,000
42,000
36
200,000
36,000
30
114,000
30,000
24
190,000
24,000
18
108,000
18,000
12
180,000
12,000
6
102,000
6,000
Or Months:
170,000
Miles:
10,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 537
X
8
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96
Or Kilometers:
Inspect the
CV joints.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the
exhaust
system.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Adjust the
parking
brake on
vehicles
equipped
with four
wheel disc
brakes.
Change the
manual
transmission fluid (if
equipped).
X
X
X
X
X
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
250,000
240,000
230,000
220,000
210,000
200,000
190,000
180,000
150,000
144,000
138,000
132,000
126,000
120,000
114,000
108,000
102,000
6,000
Or Months:
170,000
Miles:
10,000
538 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
X
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96
Or Kilometers:
Inspect the
manual
transmission fluid (if
equipped),
add as
necessary.
Change the
rear axle
fluid if using
your vehicle
for any of
the following: police,
taxi, fleet or
frequent
trailer towing.
X
X
X
X
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
X
250,000
240,000
230,000
220,000
210,000
200,000
190,000
180,000
150,000
144,000
138,000
132,000
126,000
120,000
114,000
108,000
102,000
6,000
Or Months:
170,000
Miles:
10,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 539
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
X
8
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96
Or Kilometers:
Inspect the
rear axle
fluid.
Inspect
front suspension, tie
rod ends,
and boot
seals, for
cracks or
leaks and
all parts for
damage,
wear, improper
looseness
or end play;
replace if
necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
250,000
240,000
230,000
220,000
210,000
200,000
190,000
180,000
150,000
144,000
138,000
132,000
126,000
120,000
114,000
108,000
102,000
6,000
Or Months:
170,000
Miles:
10,000
540 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
42,000
48,000
54,000
60,000
66,000
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
78
84
90
96
Or Kilometers:
Replace the
engine air
cleaner
filter.
Replace the
air conditioning filter.
Replace the
spark plugs
– 6.2L Supercharged
Engine **
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect and
replace the
PCV Valve
if necessary
X
250,000
240,000
230,000
220,000
210,000
200,000
190,000
180,000
150,000
144,000
138,000
132,000
126,000
120,000
114,000
108,000
102,000
6,000
Or Months:
170,000
Miles:
10,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 541
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
X
X
8
Or Kilometers:
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
160,000
Replace the
spark plugs
– 6.4L Engine **
Flush and
replace the
engine
coolant at
120 months
if not done
at 150,000
miles
(240,000 km).
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
150,000
96
102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144 150
250,000
96,000
90
144,000
90,000
84
240,000
84,000
78
138,000
78,000
72
230,000
72,000
66
132,000
66,000
60
220,000
60,000
54
126,000
54,000
48
210,000
48,000
42
120,000
42,000
36
200,000
36,000
30
114,000
30,000
24
190,000
24,000
18
108,000
18,000
12
180,000
12,000
6
102,000
6,000
Or Months:
170,000
Miles:
10,000
542 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
X
X
X
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 543
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
! SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .547
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 ! WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 ! MOPAR® PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
! IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547 ! REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .551
▫ FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . .548
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .548
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
▫ In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
! PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .552
9
546 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
! DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .554
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 547
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
548 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- FCA US LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (800) 423-6343
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con- Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer P.O. Box 1621
center.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cenPhone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French
ter should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 549
Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
9
550 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),
some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or
other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,
or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC
warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 551
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- 9153),
operating at its best.
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: AdminisREPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West
Building, Washington, D.C. 20590.
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
MOPAR® PARTS
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
9
552 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain- assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included
ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety
and/or components is written in straightforward lantips.
guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 553
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
9
554 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
556 INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) (Cruise Control) . . .154
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
Air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Air Bag
Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Air Bag Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Air bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Air bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
Air bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Air bag Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .482
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .484
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
INDEX 557
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .310
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .503
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . . . . . .364
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .25
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
10
558 INDEX
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .474
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Center Seat LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . . .82
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint . . . . .81
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
INDEX 559
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .76
Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .72
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Using The Top Tether Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .496
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .494
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .493
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) .
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Control (Speed Control). . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Programmable Features .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.497
.497
.496
.496
.493
.504
.154
.210
.547
.250
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476
Deck Lid, Emergency Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Deck Lid, Power Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
10
560 INDEX
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .496
Door Locks
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Driver Information Display
DID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Driving
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow Standing
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . .510
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .149
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Emergency Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465
Emergency Trunk Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .474
INDEX 561
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Exterior Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Filler Location Fuel . . .
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . .
Air Conditioning . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Disposal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.482
.321
.481
.481
10
562 INDEX
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .492
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .529
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Adding . . . . . . . . .
Additives . . . . . . . .
Clean Air . . . . . . . .
Ethanol . . . . . . . . .
Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
Gasoline . . . . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . . . . .
Materials Added . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . .
Octane Rating . . . . .
Requirements . . . . .
Specifications . . . . .
Tank Capacity . . . . .
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.434
.432
.430
.431
.434
.430
.221
.432
.431
.430
.430
.529
.528
.434
.510
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink®) . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
INDEX 563
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . .
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . .
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . .
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speedometer . . . . . . . . .
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . .
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . .
Gross Axle Weight Rating . .
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508
Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Headlight Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437 Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch .
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380 Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442 HomeLink® (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.526
.135
.508
.137
.139
.138
.135
.139
.134
.137
.488
.488
.128
.128
.110
.350
.139
.393
.194
10
564 INDEX
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132 Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456
Ignition
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .507
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
iPod® Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
iPod®/USB/MP3 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .18
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .18
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Keyless Enter-N-Go™
Enter The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Unlock From The Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Unlock From The Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
INDEX 565
Keyless Entry System . . .
Keyless Go. . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.22
.12
.17
.12
.16
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
10
566 INDEX
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .527
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .221
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . .142
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . .221
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . .221
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .487
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.482
.476
.534
.221
.552
.351
.501
INDEX 567
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
MOPAR® Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .528
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41 Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430 Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
10
568 INDEX
Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .385
ParkSense® System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .408
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
Deck Lid Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .516
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . .206
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .531
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap)
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . .
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . .
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . .
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear Cupholder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.415
.496
.308
.307
.306
.145
.191
.210
.181
INDEX 569
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485
Release, Hood. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .18
Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .18
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Unlatch The Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .307
Remote Starting
Uconnect® Customer Programmable Features . . .267
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .267
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Remote Trunk Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .523
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
10
570 INDEX
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .551
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .534
Seat Belt
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .51
Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .509
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
INDEX 571
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
SENTRY KEY®
FCC General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .547
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .549
Service Engine Soon Light (Malfunction Indicator) . .221
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .552
Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
Side View Mirror Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
SRT Performance Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
10
572 INDEX
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .307
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .54
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .318
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . . .407
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .412
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
INDEX 573
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . .
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . .
Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.423
.221
.553
.415
.419
.421
.400
.401
.417
.417
.418
.400
.445
.132
.439
.465
.439
.439
.379
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .351
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .25
Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .24
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .22
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Trunk Release, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Trunk Release Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
10
574 INDEX
Uconnect®
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . .267
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Uconnect® Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . .264
Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Uconnect® Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
Uconnect® Voice Command. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Security Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .18
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .221
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .550
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .504
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .506
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
INDEX 575
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
15D492-126-AD
Fourth Edition Rev 1
Printed in U.S.A.
2015 Challenger SRT 392 / SRT Hellcat
Chrysler Group LLC
2015
OWNER’S MANUAL
Challenger
SRT 392 / SRT Hellcat
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project